JP2019050874A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of simplifying assembly work and maintenance of the game machine.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 1A is provided with an opening 432e in a cover member 430 so that it is possible to connect wiring from a game board relay board 101 of a game board 12A housed inside the space formed by a back surface part 431 and at least two side surface parts 432 to a relay board 100 provided outside the cover member 430. The relay board 100 connected to the wiring via the opening 432e can be housed in a side surface first recess 432a. To the side surface first recess 432a, the recess 431a and the side surface second recess 432c which can house the main control board 70A and a sub control board 80A respectively are adjacent.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 73

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  Conventionally, a main board case for storing a main board has been arranged under the base cover attached to the board surface so as to face and cover the back surface of the board surface board, and an effect control board is installed inside the back side of the base cover. There is disclosed a gaming machine in which a housed production control board case is arranged (see Patent Document 1). According to such a gaming machine, various substrates can be provided on the back side of the base cover.

JP 2014-144146 A

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, since various boards are separated from each other, a cable connecting these boards becomes long, and the assembly work of the gaming machine becomes complicated. In addition, for example, when a malfunction occurs in a gaming machine and it is not possible to specify which board causes the error, it is necessary to check the boards that are separated from each other one by one, and there is a problem that maintenance becomes complicated.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can solve such problems and simplify the assembly work and maintenance of the gaming machine.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention can accommodate a mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) and a gaming machine component (for example, main control board 70A) including electrical components, and covers the mounting base from the back side. (For example, a cover member 430), a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A),
The cover member can accommodate at least a part of the gaming machine components in a space formed by a back surface portion (for example, the back surface portion 431) and at least two side surface portions (for example, the side surface portion 432). ,
The width of the back portion is formed narrower than the width of the mounting base,
The side surface portion includes an attachment portion (for example, an attachment portion 433) that can be attached to the attachment base on an end portion side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one of the side surface portions is provided with the attachment portion. Formed so as to incline from the end to the end adjacent to the back surface,
The cover member is
An opening (e.g., an opening 432e) provided so that wiring from a gaming machine component housed inside the space can be connected to a gaming machine component provided outside the cover member;
A specific accommodation part (for example, the first side recess 432a on the side surface) that is provided on the outer surface of the side surface part and can accommodate a specific gaming machine component (for example, the relay board 100) connected to the wiring via the opening. )When,
General accommodation that is provided on the outer surface of the cover member and that is configured by at least two or more accommodation units each capable of accommodating a plurality of other types of gaming machine components (for example, main control board 70A and sub control board 80A). Parts (for example, side surface second recess 432c, recess 431a),
In the general accommodation unit, at least two or more accommodation units are adjacent to the specific accommodation unit.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an attachment base and a cover member. The cover member
A gaming machine component can be accommodated, the attachment base is covered from the back side, and at least a part of the gaming machine component can be accommodated in a space formed by the back surface and at least two side surfaces.
And the width | variety of a back part is formed narrower than the width | variety of an attachment base. The side surface portion includes an attachment portion that can be attached to the attachment base on the end portion side not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one side surface portion is inclined from the end portion where the attachment portion is provided to the end portion adjacent to the back surface portion. It is formed to do. The cover member includes an opening, a specific accommodation portion, and a general accommodation portion. The opening is provided so that wiring from a gaming machine component housed in the space can be connected to a gaming machine component provided outside the cover member. The specific accommodating portion is provided on the outer surface of the side surface portion, and can accommodate a specific gaming machine component connected to the wiring via the opening. The general housing portion is provided on the outer surface of the cover member, and is configured by at least two or more housing portions each capable of housing a plurality of other types of gaming machine components. At least two or more housing portions are specified housing portions. Adjacent to.

  As a result, since at least one of the side surfaces of the cover member is inclined, when the depth dimension is the same, the area where the gaming machine component can be installed becomes larger than when the side surface portion is not inclined. It is possible to attach gaming machine components. In addition, in the cover member, an opening portion, a gaming machine component provided on the outside of the cover member with wiring from a gaming machine component housed in a space formed by the back surface portion and at least two side surfaces, and It is provided so that it can be connected, and a specific gaming machine component that is connected to the wiring through the opening can be accommodated in the specific accommodation part, and each of the other plural types of gaming machine components is accommodated in this specific accommodation part. At least two possible receptacles were adjacent. As a result, even if a wider variety of gaming machine components can be attached, a variety of gaming machine components can be aggregated and arranged, and the cable connecting them can be shortened. Therefore, it is easy to check various game machine components and route cables. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can simplify the assembly work and maintenance of the gaming machine.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can simplify the assembly operation | work and maintenance of a game machine can be provided.

1 is an external perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a partially exploded perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement aspect of a movable accessory in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of a movable accessory. It is sectional drawing which follows the VII-VII line of FIG. It is a top view of the state which removed the decorative cover of the movable accessory. It is a perspective view which shows the reel accessory in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of a reel accessory. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the projector unit in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a partially cutaway side view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the projection angle and projection distance of the projector apparatus in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. 1 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the projector control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the communication operation | movement of the control circuit in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control circuit main process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control circuit main process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory | storage check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening release process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before the big winning opening of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval processing of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game completion | finish process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the system timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the game information data generation process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the port output process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sub control circuit main process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation selection process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation suppression process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation | movement of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation | movement of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation | movement of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation | movement of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation | movement of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of presentation operation | movement of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the modification of a game board. It is a front view which shows the modification of a game board. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation on the game board shown in FIGS. 46 and 47. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation on the game board shown in FIGS. 46 and 47. It is a figure showing an example of reach production operation. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of reach effect operation in the game board shown in FIG. 47. It is a top view which shows the modification of a movable accessory. It is sectional drawing which follows the LII-LII line | wire of FIG. It is a figure which shows the other modification of a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows the other modification of a movable accessory. It is a partially cutaway side view of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a partially cutaway side view of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of the rendering operation of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 57. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of the rendering operation of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 57. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 55. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st modification of an effect suppression process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd modification of an effect suppression process. It is a figure which shows the light emission luminance correction table used in the 2nd modification of an effect suppression process. It is an external appearance perspective view of the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the main body frame in the gaming machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the attachment frame in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view of the game board in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view of the game board in the game machine concerning the modification of 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the attachment base in the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the attachment base in the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is sectional drawing of the main body frame in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the optical axis of the projection light radiate | emitted from the projector unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of the cover member in the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the cover member in the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship of the game board relay board | substrate in the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, the board | substrate hole of an attachment base, and the opening part of a cover member. It is a top view of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the main body frame in the gaming machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the 1st guide rod and the 2nd guide rod in the gaming machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the 1st guide rod and the 2nd guide rod in the gaming machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a whole perspective view which shows the payout apparatus in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view showing a ball passage unit contained in a payout device in a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the ball path unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball passage unit in a direction different from FIG. 84. It is a top view which shows the 1st guide path of the ball path unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view which shows the 2nd guidance path of the ball passage unit in the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view which shows the out port of the game board in the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the ball | bowl detection unit located behind an out port in the state which removed the game board in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the whole ball | bowl detection unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the ball | bowl detection unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view showing the sphere detection unit in a direction different from FIG. 91. It is an internal side view of the right side structural member which comprises the ball | bowl detection unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an internal side view of the left side structural member which comprises the ball | bowl detection unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a top view of the protruding piece member which comprises the ball | bowl detection unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a whole perspective view which shows the glass door provided with the dish unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a whole front view which shows the front of the glass door in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is an expansion perspective view which shows the whole dish unit in the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the dish unit in the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view of the dish unit in the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a top view of the state which removed the saucer cover member of the saucer unit in the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body part in a game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention, a ball extraction passage member, and a lid opening and closing part from the back side. It is an exploded view of the figure shown in FIG. It is a perspective view of the ball extraction passage member in the game machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is AA 'sectional drawing in FIG. It is BB 'sectional drawing in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the ball extraction passage member in the gaming machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Structure of pachinko machine>
First, the structure of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a partially exploded perspective view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front view of a game board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. A pachinko gaming machine 1 is applied as the gaming machine of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a game board 12, a main body 2, a base door 3 attached to the main body 2 so as to be opened and closed, and attached to the base door 3 so as to be opened and closed. The glass door 4, the dish unit 14, the launching device 15, the dispensing device 16, and the substrate unit 17 are provided.

[Main unit]
The main body 2 is composed of a frame-shaped member having a rectangular opening 2a (see FIG. 3). The main body 2 is formed of a material such as wood. The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via the main body 2.

[Base door]
The base door 3 is configured by a plate-like member having a rectangular outer shape that is substantially equal to the outer shape of the main body 2. The base door 3 is disposed in front of the main body 2 (on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine) and is rotatably supported by the main body 2 via a main body frame hinge 2b. That is, the opening 2a of the main body 2 is formed by rotating the base door 3 around the main body frame hinge 2b provided at the side edge of one side of the main body 2 (left side as viewed from the front in this embodiment). Is opened and closed. As shown in FIG. 3, the base door 3 is provided with a rectangular opening 3 a. The opening 3a is formed from the substantially central portion of the base door 3 to the upper region, and is sized to occupy most of the region.

  A game board 12, a liquid crystal display device 13, a dish unit 14, a launching device 15, a payout device 16, and a substrate unit 17 are attached to the base door 3.

  The game board 12 is composed of a plate-shaped resin member. The game board 12 is located behind the protective glass 28 of the glass door 4 to be described later, and is arranged so as to cover the opening 3 a of the base door 3.

  On the front surface of the game board 12 (surface on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1), a game area 12a in which a game ball launched from the launching device 15 rolls is formed. The game area 12a is an area surrounded by a guide rail 41 (specifically, an outer rail 41a shown in FIG. 4 to be described later), and its outer peripheral shape is substantially circular. Furthermore, a plurality of game nails 56 (partially not shown) are driven into the game area 12a. The configuration of the game board 12 (game area 12a) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The liquid crystal display device 13 is attached to the back side of the game board 12 (the side opposite to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1). The liquid crystal display device 13 has a display area 13a for displaying an image. The display area 13a is set to a size that occupies a partial area on the surface of the game board 12 (game area 12a). The display area 13a uniformly forms a black or gray screen when an image is not displayed with the power off. The size of the display area 13a may be set to occupy the entire surface of the game board 12 (game area 12a). In the display area 13a, various kinds of images such as an effect identification pattern (for example, an image indicating a number), an effect image (for example, an image indicating a character or a background), and a decoration image (for example, an image indicating a decorative pattern) are displayed. . The player can view various images displayed on the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 through the game board 12. In the following, an image displayed on the display area 13a by liquid crystal driving of the liquid crystal display device 13 may be referred to as a liquid crystal image.

  In this embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 13 is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and examples of the display device include a plasma display, a projection display, a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display, and an organic display. An EL (Electro Luminescence) display or the like may be applied.

  The dish unit 14 is disposed below the game board 12. The dish unit 14 includes an upper dish 21 and a lower dish 22 disposed below the upper dish 21. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22 are formed with a payout port 21 a and a supply port 22 a for renting out game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls), respectively. When a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, the game balls are discharged from the payout port 21a and the supply port 22a and stored in the upper plate 21 and the lower plate 22, respectively. Further, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are launched into the game area 12 a by the launching device 15.

  The dish unit 14 is provided with an effect button 23. The effect button 23 is attached on the upper plate 21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of performing a predetermined operation effect using the effect button 23. When performing the predetermined operation effect, the effect button 23 is displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. An image prompting the user to operate is displayed. In addition to displaying images associated with the game, a selection button 31 for operating a menu screen for displaying a game history and personal game data and a determination button 32 for confirming the selected content are provided.

  The launcher 15 is disposed in the lower right region (near the lower right corner) on the front surface of the base door 3. The launching device 15 includes a launching handle 25 that can be operated by a player, and the firing handle 25 is rotatably supported.

  Although not shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the launching device 15 is provided with a solenoid actuator (launching drive device) that controls the launching operation of the game ball. Although not shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, a touch sensor is provided at the periphery of the firing handle 25, and a firing volume is provided inside the firing handle 25. The firing volume changes the resistance value according to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 25, and changes the power supplied to the solenoid actuator.

  In the present embodiment, the firing operation is controlled by the payout / firing control circuit 123 (see FIG. 14) connected to the main control circuit 70 (see FIG. 14). Inside the launcher 15, a spring member (not shown) is provided for elastically urging the launch handle 25 in a counterclockwise direction at all times. The game ball is fired by rotating the firing handle 25 in the clockwise direction against the movement. Further, when the player interrupts the game and releases the hand from the firing handle 25, the firing handle 25 is returned to the start time position by the elasticity of the spring member. Thereby, the launch of the game ball is stopped.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player's hand contacts the touch sensor of the launch handle 25, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal. Thereby, it is detected that the player has gripped the launch handle 25, and the game ball can be launched by the solenoid actuator. When the player holds the firing handle 25 and rotates it clockwise (when viewed from the player side), the resistance of the firing volume changes according to the turning angle of the firing handle 25. The electric power corresponding to the resistance value is supplied to the solenoid actuator. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are sequentially fired, and the fired game balls are discharged to the game area 12a of the game board 12 while being guided along the guide rail 41 (see FIG. 4).

  The dispensing device 16 and the substrate unit 17 are disposed on the back side of the base door 3. A game ball is supplied to the payout device 16 from a storage unit (not shown). The payout device 16 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from the game balls supplied from the storage unit to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 22 based on the establishment of the payout condition. The board unit 17 has various control boards. Various control boards are provided with a main control circuit 70 and a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 14), which will be described later.

[Glass door]
The glass door 4 is composed of a plate-like member having a substantially square surface. The glass door 4 is disposed on the front side of the game board 12 and has a size that covers the game board 12. A pair of speakers 11 is disposed on the upper part of the glass door 4 (near the upper end). A speaker cover 29 is provided in the upper region facing the speaker 11 on the front surface of the glass door 4. In the following description, the “front surface” is the surface facing the player of the pachinko gaming machine, and the “back surface” is the surface opposite to the surface facing the player.

  In the central portion of the glass door 4, an opening 4 a having a size that exposes at least the game area 12 a is formed in an area facing the game area 12 a of the game board 12. A protective glass 28 having light transmittance is attached to the opening 4a. Thereby, the opening 4a of the glass door 4 is closed. Therefore, when the glass door 4 is closed with respect to the base door 3, the protective glass 28 is disposed so as to face at least the game area 12 a of the game board 12.

  In addition, an upper decoration unit 40 is provided in the upper region of the front surface of the glass door 4. The upper decoration unit 40 is disposed so as to protrude forward of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The interior of the upper decoration unit 40 is formed in a cavity, and the projector unit B (see FIG. 11) is accommodated in this cavity. The projector unit B will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a frame member 4b is provided on the back side of the glass door 4, and the speaker 11 and the projector unit B are attached to the upper part of the frame member 4b.

  The upper decoration unit 40 is provided with speaker covers 29 on the right side and the left side, respectively. The speaker cover 29 is formed as a mesh-shaped opening. The speaker cover 29 covers the front of the speaker 11, and sound generated from the speaker 11 is emitted to the outside through the speaker cover 29.

[Game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 12.

  On the front surface of the game board 12, as shown in FIG. 4, a guide rail 41, a ball passage detector (gate) 43, a first start port 44, a second start port 45, and an ordinary electric accessory 46 Is provided. Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, general winning ports 51 and 52, a first grand prize winning port 53, a second major winning prize port 54, an out port 55, and a plurality of game nails 56 are provided. Further, on the front surface of the game board 12, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, and a normal symbol hold display device 63 are provided above the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 disposed substantially at the center. A first special symbol hold display device 64 and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are provided. On the front surface of the game board 12, a plurality of decorative members 66A, 66B, and 66C capable of emitting light are provided at respective portions near the periphery of the game area 12a. On the front side of the game board 12, as viewed from the player side, on the left side of the first starting port 44 at the lower part of the display area 13a, the reel accessory is provided through the opening 12b provided in the game board 12 (game area 12a). 67 is provided so as to be visible. Furthermore, as viewed from the player side, on the right side of the upper area on the back surface of the game board 12, a movable accessory 68 imitating a sword is provided so as to be operable up to a position overlapping the display area 13a.

  Although not shown in FIG. 4, an effect 7-segment counter is also provided on the front surface of the game board 12. The production 7-segment counter is composed of a display counter capable of displaying two-digit numbers and two alphabetic characters. In addition, in this embodiment, a notification LED (Light Emitting Diode) that is turned on when the result of the special symbol stop display is “big hit”, a round number display LED that shows the number of rounds during the big hit game, and the like are provided. Also good.

[Various components of game area]
The guide rail 41 includes an outer rail 41a extending in an arc shape that partitions the game area 12a, and an inner rail 41b extending in an arc shape disposed on the inner side (inner peripheral side) of the outer rail 41a. Is done. The game area 12a is formed inside the outer rail 41a. The outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b are disposed so as to face each other in the vicinity of the left end portion of the game area 12a when viewed from the player side, and thereby, between the outer rail 41a and the inner rail 41b, A guide path 41c for guiding the game ball launched by 15 to the upper part of the game area 12a is formed.

  In addition, a ball discharge port 41d is formed at the tip of the inner rail 41b located at the upper left portion of the game area 12a by the tip of the inner rail 41b and a part of the outer rail 41a facing the tip. And the ball | bowl return prevention piece 42 is provided in the front-end | tip part of the inner rail 41b so that the ball | bowl discharge port 41d may be plugged up. The ball return prevention piece 42 prevents the game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d into the game area 12a from passing through the ball discharge port 41d again and entering the guide path 41c.

  The game ball released from the ball discharge port 41d flows down from the upper part of the game area 12a toward the lower part. At this time, the game ball collides with various members provided in the game area 12a such as the plurality of game nails 56, the first start opening 44, the second start opening 45, etc., and changes the traveling direction of the game area 12a. It flows down from the top to the bottom.

  A display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 is provided substantially at the center of the game area 12a. An obstacle 13b is provided at the upper end of the display area 13a. By providing the obstacle 13b, the game ball does not pass over an area overlapping the display area 13a in the game area 12a.

  The ball passage detector 43 is disposed in the vicinity of the right end of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The ball passage detector 43 is provided with a passage ball sensor 43a (see FIG. 14) for detecting a passing game ball. In addition, when a game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not it is “winning”, and based on the result of the lottery, a normal symbol variation display is started.

  The first start port 44 is disposed below the display area 13 a, and the second start port 45 is disposed below the first start port 44. The 1st starting opening 44 and the 2nd starting opening 45 are comprised by the member which can receive a game ball. Hereinafter, the entry of the game ball into the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 or inflow and passing therethrough is referred to as “winning”. When the game ball wins the first start port 44 or the second start port 45, a first predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls is paid out. In addition, when a game ball enters the first start port 44, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is “big hit” or “small hit”, and the special symbol changes based on the result of the lottery. Display starts. Further, when a game ball enters the second start opening 45, a lottery is performed to determine whether the game is “big hit” or “small hit”, and the special symbol changes based on the result of the lottery. Display starts.

  The first start port 44 is provided with a first start port winning ball sensor 44a (see FIG. 14) for detecting a game ball won in the first start port 44. In addition, the second start opening 45 is provided with a second start opening winning ball sensor 45a (see FIG. 14) for detecting a game ball won. The game balls that have won the first start port 44 and the second start port 45 pass through the out port 55 provided in the game board 12 and are transported to the game ball collecting unit.

  The ordinary electric accessory 46 is provided at the second start opening 45. The ordinary electric accessory 46 includes a pair of blade members rotatably attached to both sides of the second start port 45, and an ordinary electric agent solenoid 46a (see FIG. 14) that drives the pair of blade members. This ordinary electric accessory 46 is driven by an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a, and opens the pair of blade members to make it easier to win a game ball in the second start opening 45, and closes the pair of blade members. One state of a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won is generated at the second start opening 45. In the present embodiment, when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in a closed state, the opening form of the pair of blade members is not a form that makes it impossible to win a prize, but a form that makes it difficult to win a game ball. Also good.

  The general winning ports 51 and 52 are arranged near the lower part of the game area. The general winning ports 51 and 52 are configured by members capable of receiving game balls. In the following, it is also referred to as “winning” that the game ball enters the general winning holes 51 and 52 or flows in and passes. When game balls win the general winning ports 51 and 52, a second predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out. The general winning ports 51 and 52 are provided with general winning ball sensors 51a and 52a (see FIG. 14) for detecting the game balls that have won the winning balls.

  The first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 are arranged below the ball passage detector 43 and between the first start opening 44 and the general prize opening 52. The first grand prize port 53 and the second grand prize port 54 are arranged in the vertical direction along the flow path of the game ball, and the first grand prize port 53 is arranged above the second grand prize port 54. The Both the first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 are so-called attacker type opening / closing devices, and shutters 53a and 54a that can be opened and closed, and a first big prize opening solenoid 53b and a second large that drive the shutter. A winning opening solenoid 54b (see FIG. 14).

  Each of the first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 receives a game ball when the corresponding shutter is open (open state), and plays when the shutter is closed (closed state). Do not accept the ball. In the following, it is also referred to as “winning” that a game ball enters or flows into the first grand prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54. When a game ball wins the first grand prize opening 53, a third predetermined number of balls (15 balls in the present embodiment) are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball wins the second grand prize opening 54, a fourth predetermined number of balls (15 balls in this embodiment) are paid out.

  Further, the first grand prize opening 53 is provided with a count sensor 53c (see FIG. 14) for counting the game balls won in the first big prize opening 53. Further, the second grand prize opening 54 is provided with a count sensor 54c (see FIG. 14) for counting game balls won in the second big prize opening 54.

  The out port 55 is provided at the lowermost part of the game area 12a. The out port 55 receives game balls that have not won any of the first start port 44, the second start port 45, the general winning ports 51, 52, the first big winning port 53, and the second big winning port 54. .

  When the arrangement of various components in the game area 12a of the present embodiment is as shown in FIG. 4, when a game ball is thrown into the area on the right side of the game area 12a by the player (when it is hit right), A game ball is guided to the second starting port 45 by the game nail 56 or the like. In this case, there is almost no possibility of winning the first start opening 44. In the present embodiment, it is easier for the player who wins the second start opening 45 to receive a lottery advantageous to the player than when the first start opening 44 wins. Therefore, in the so-called short-time gaming state where the winning to the second starting port 45 is relatively easy, the right-handed game increases the possibility of winning the second starting port 45 and relatively gains valuable value. Easy state.

[Special symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the special symbol display device 61 is disposed at the approximate center of the upper portion of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The special symbol display device 61 is a display device that variably displays special symbols (variable display and stop display) in a special symbol game. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, a special symbol display device 61 is configured by a device that displays special symbols as symbols composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. In addition, this invention is not limited to this, You may comprise the special symbol display apparatus 61 by several LED, for example. In this case, a display pattern configured by turning on / off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

  The special symbol display device 61 displays the variation of the special symbol when the game ball wins the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 (special symbol start winning). Then, the special symbol display device 61 performs the special symbol stop display after performing the variable symbol special symbol display for a predetermined time. Hereinafter, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the first start opening 44 is referred to as a first special symbol. The special symbol that is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61 when the game ball wins the second start opening 45 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a specific mode (“big hit” mode), the gaming state is advantageous to the player from the normal gaming state. It shifts to the big hit gaming state which is a state. That is, in the special symbol display device 61, it is “big hit” that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a state of shifting to the big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, the first big winning port 53 or the second big winning port 54 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start opening 44 and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the special symbol display device 61, the first big winning opening 53 Becomes an open state. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the second start opening 45 and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific manner on the special symbol display device 61, the second big winning port 54 is opened.

  The open state of each of the first grand prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or until a certain period (for example, 28 seconds) elapses. And if the elapsed period of the open state of each big prize opening satisfy | fills any of these conditions, the big prize opening which was the open state will be in a closed state.

  A game in which the first big prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54 is in a state (open state) in which it is easy to accept a game ball is called a round game. During the round game, the big prize opening is closed. A round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

  In the special symbol display device 61, when the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than a specific mode (a mode of “losing”), the gaming state does not shift except when the falling lottery is won. That is, the special symbol game is a game in which the special symbol is variably displayed by the special symbol display device 61, and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the gaming state is shifted or maintained depending on the result.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the first start opening 44 while the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed, the variable of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is made. The display (holding ball) is put on hold. Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called “holding number (the number of holding balls)”) is defined as a maximum of four times (pieces).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a game ball wins the second start opening 45 during the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) Is put on hold. Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays (holding number) of the second special symbol to be held is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in this embodiment, the total number of variable symbols to be held is 8 at the maximum.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variation display of one special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the other special symbol. . In addition, this invention is not limited to this, When the reservation ball | bowl of a 1st special symbol and the reservation ball | bowl of a 2nd special symbol coexist, you may make it perform the change display of a special symbol in the order kept.

[Normal symbol display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 62 is disposed in the approximate center of the upper portion of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 62 is disposed on the right side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side.

  The normal symbol display device 62 is a display device for variably displaying normal symbols (variation display and stop display) in a normal symbol game. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display device 62 is configured by two LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs) arranged in the vertical direction. In the normal symbol display device 62, a display pattern constituted by turning on / off each normal symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

  The normal symbol display device 62 displays the variation of the normal symbol by turning on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs alternately when the game ball passes the ball passage detector 43. Then, the normal symbol display device 62 performs the normal symbol stop display after performing the normal symbol variation display for a predetermined time.

  In the normal symbol display device 62, when the stopped normal symbol is in a predetermined mode (a “win” mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of “losing”), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state. That is, the normal symbol game is a game in which the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 62, and then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the normal electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

  If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the normal symbol variation display, the normal symbol variable display is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol that is currently in the variable display is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable symbols of the normal symbol to be held (that is, the “holding number”) is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[Normal symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol hold display device 63 is disposed at the approximate center of the upper portion of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol hold display device 63 is disposed below the normal symbol display device 62.

  The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of hold of variable display of normal symbols. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol hold display device 63 is configured by four LEDs (normal symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays the number of normal symbols that are variably displayed by turning on / off each normal symbol hold display LED.

  Specifically, when the number of holdings of the normal symbol variable display is 1, the normal symbol holding display LED located on the leftmost side when viewed from the player side (the first normal symbol holding display LED from the left) Lights up, and other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. When the number of normal symbol variable display hold is 2, the first and second normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. When the number of normal symbol variable display hold is 3, the first to third normal symbol hold display LEDs from the left are turned on, and the other normal symbol hold display LEDs are turned off. When the number of normal symbol variable display hold is 4, all the normal symbol hold display LEDs are lit.

[First special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol hold display device 64 is disposed on the left side of the special symbol display device 61 when viewed from the player side in the upper part of the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  The first special symbol hold display device 64 has four LEDs (first special symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. The display mode of the first special symbol hold display device 64 is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol hold display device 63. That is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is on hold, the first special symbol hold display LED from the first special symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side to the number of reserved pieces as viewed from the player side. Lights up.

[Second special symbol hold display device]
As shown in FIG. 4, the second special symbol hold display device 65 is located on the left side of the special symbol display device 61 at the upper part of the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 when viewed from the player side. 61 and the first special symbol hold display device 64.

  The second special symbol hold display device 65 has four LEDs (second special symbol hold display LEDs) arranged in the left-right direction. The display mode of the second special symbol hold display device 65 is the same as the display mode of the normal symbol hold display device 63. That is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is held, the second special symbol hold display LED from the second special symbol hold display LED located on the leftmost side to the hold number when viewed from the player side. Lights up.

[Liquid Crystal Display]
The liquid crystal display device 13 displays various effect images (liquid crystal images) in the display area 13a. Specifically, in the present embodiment, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 61 is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is variably displayed on the special symbol display device 61, except for a specific case, for example, a plurality of effect identifications including numbers 1 to 8 and various characters as effect images The design (decorative design) is variably displayed in the display area 13a. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 61, a plurality of decorative symbols (such as a jackpot symbol to be described later) corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area 13a.

  Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display device 61 is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is “big hit”), the player can grasp that it is “big hit”. The effect image is displayed in the display area 13a. As an effect for causing the player to grasp that it is a “hit”, for example, first, a plurality of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same decorative symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction) After that, there is an effect of displaying an image for informing the “big hit”.

[Decorative material]
The decorative members 66A, 66B, and 66C each have a light-transmitting cover member (not shown) and an LED (not shown) provided on the back side of the cover member, and the LED light is played through the cover member. Release toward the front of the board 12 (game area 12a). The decorative member 66A is provided on the right side of the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The decoration member 66B is provided on the left side of the display area 13a and slightly below the decoration member 66A when viewed from the player side. The two decorative members 66C are provided on the left and right sides of the second starting port 45 below the display area 13a when viewed from the player side. The LEDs of the decoration members 66A, 66B, and 66C belong to the lamp / LED group 18 (see FIG. 14), and are controlled so that light emission, blinking, extinguishing, or luminance increases or decreases as effects. Thereby, decoration member 66A, 66B, 66C improves the effect effect of light.

[Reel role]
As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the reel accessory 67 is attached to the back surface of the game board 12. As shown well in FIG. 10, the reel accessory 67 is a hollow reel body 670 around which a sheet member 671 is wound in a cylindrical shape, and a first support that rotatably supports one end (right end) of the reel body 670. A member 672, a rotation gear 673 fixed to the other end (left end) of the reel body 670, a motor 674 for driving the rotation gear 673 to rotate in a predetermined direction, and a rotation gear 673 on the other end side of the reel body 670. And a second support member 675 that supports the motor 674, a shaft 676 that passes through the rotation gear 673 and is fixed to the second support member 675 so as to be positioned inside the reel body 670, and a shaft viewed from the player side. A light emitting board 678 attached to the rear portion of 676 and mounted with an LED 677 facing the front, and a cover member 679 covering the right side and the rear side of the reel body 670 as viewed from the player side. That. In FIG. 10, only one LED 677 is shown for convenience, but a plurality of LEDs 677 are mounted on the light emitting substrate 678.

  As an example, blue 7 and red 7 of an identification pattern (identification information) are drawn on the sheet member 671 at a predetermined interval, and a plain blank is formed between the blue 7 and the red 7. (See FIG. 44). In this embodiment, the blank is also referred to as an identification symbol. The sheet member 671 is formed of a translucent material, and the identification pattern is also formed of special ink that is translucent and rich in color. When the reel body 670 is rotated as an effect operation, the identification symbol of the sheet member 671 is variably displayed on the peripheral surface of the reel body 670, and a predetermined identification symbol is stopped and displayed depending on the subsequent stop mode. It becomes visible to the player from the opening 12b as an indication of whether or not it is in a state.

  Further, when the reel unit 670 is rotating or stopped, the LED 677 of the light emitting board 678 is controlled to emit light, blink, extinguish, or change in luminance. The light of the LED 677 travels forward from the opening 12b of the game board 12 while passing through the sheet member 671. As a result, the identification symbol that is displayed in a variable manner or stopped on the peripheral surface of the reel unit 670 is illuminated from the rear, making it easier to visually recognize than in the extinguished state. Such an LED 677 also belongs to the lamp / LED group 18 (see FIG. 14) and improves the effect of the light.

[Movable combination]
As shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the movable accessory 68 is entirely located on the back side of the upper decoration unit 40 so as to be hidden when viewed from the player side in the standby state (non-operating state) (FIG. 5A In the appearance state, a part (sword part) is configured to move to a position overlapping with a part of the display area 13a (see FIGS. 5B and 12). Thereby, the movable accessory 68 performs a predetermined effect operation so as to cover the effect image displayed in the display area 13a. The movable accessory 68 includes a decorative portion 68A that forms a sword portion, and a drive portion 68B that drives the decorative portion 68A. 5 (A) and 5 (B) show a state in which the upper decoration unit 40 is removed. With the upper decoration unit 40 attached, for example, in the standby state in FIG. 5 (A), The movable accessory 68 cannot actually be visually recognized by the upper decoration unit 40.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the decorative portion 68 </ b> A is fixed to the base member 680, the electric decoration board 682 fixed to the base member 680 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 681, and the electric decoration board 682 so as to cover these LEDs 681. A light diffusing plate 683 provided on the surface, a light-transmitting cover member 684, and a light-transmitting non-transparent member 685 provided at the center of the cover member 684. . FIG. 8 shows a state in which the light diffusing plate 683, the cover member 684, and the like are removed from the members constituting the decorative portion 68A.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a driven gear 686 is fixed to the base end portion of the base member 680. The drive unit 68B includes a drive gear 687 and a motor 688 for rotating the drive gear 687 in both directions. As shown in FIG. 12, the drive unit 68 </ b> B is provided on the upper right side on the back surface of the upper decoration unit 40 as viewed from the player side.

  The base member 680 is supported by a support member (not shown) through the upper right driven gear 686 on the back surface of the upper decoration unit 40 when viewed from the player side. The driven gear 686 is rotatably supported by a support member (not shown) provided on the back side of the upper decorative unit 40 and meshes with the drive gear 687. As a result, when the drive gear 687 rotates in a predetermined direction by a predetermined angle, the driven gear 686 rotates by a predetermined angle in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, and the base member 680 tilts integrally with the cover member 684.

  The illumination board 682 includes a plurality of LEDs 681 that can emit light, blink, extinguish, or increase / decrease in luminance in conjunction with the movement of the base member 680 and the like, and is fixed to the base member 680. A light diffusing plate 683 is provided on the surface of the illumination board 682 on which the plurality of LEDs 681 are mounted. The light of the LED 681 travels while widely diffusing from the central part to the peripheral part of the cover member 684 via the light diffusion plate 683. Such an LED 681 also belongs to the lamp / LED group 18 (see FIG. 14), and enhances the effect by emitting light or blinking.

  The cover member 684 transmits the light guided from the LED 681 through the light diffusion plate 683 and emits the light outward. However, in the central portion of the cover member 684, the non-transmissive member 685 blocks light traveling outward. As a result, when viewed from the player side, the central portion of the cover member 684 on which the non-transmissive member 685 is disposed is visually recognized as a non-light emitting area that does not appear to emit light to the surrounding light emitting areas. As a result, even if the LED 681 emits light or blinks, a clear projection image can be projected by projecting a projection image described later only on the non-transmissive member 685.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, such a movable accessory 68 is maintained in a substantially horizontal posture with the decorative portion 68A hidden behind the upper decorative unit 40 at the standby position, while FIG. As shown in FIG. 12B and FIG. 12, the decoration portion 68A appears in an inclined posture in a state where a part of the decoration portion 68A overlaps the display area 13a. The production effect is improved by the appearance operation of the movable accessory 68.

[Projector unit]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and FIG. 12, a projector unit B is provided inside the upper decoration unit 40. The projector unit B is detachably attached to the upper decoration unit 40. As shown in FIG. 11, the projector unit B includes a projector cover B1 that is detachably accommodated in the upper decoration unit 40, and a projector apparatus body B2 that is attached to the back of the projector cover B1 and emits irradiation light including an image. A mirror member B3 attached in front of the projector cover B1 so as to be disposed in front of the projector apparatus main body B2 and reflecting the irradiation light from the projector apparatus main body B2 in the direction of the game board 12 disposed obliquely downward and rearward; have. Such a projector unit B functions as projection means capable of projecting an image as an effect, and realizes so-called projection mapping.

  Here, the projection mapping is generally for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object. In this embodiment, in addition to the entire front surface of the game board 12, the decorative member 66A is used. , 66B, 66C, the reel accessory 67, and the movable accessory 68 are projected, and the image is projected on the basis of the production information according to the position (projection distance, projection angle, etc.) and shape, thereby achieving high definition. A powerful presentation display can be realized.

  The projector apparatus main body B2 is attached to the upper inner surface of the projector cover B1. The projector apparatus body B2 is attached so that the attachment posture and angle can be arbitrarily adjusted. As shown in FIG. 12, the projector apparatus main body B2 emits irradiation light emitted so as to form an image from a light source (not shown) toward the front mirror member B3.

  The mirror member B3 is attached to the inner side surface of the front portion of the projector cover B1. The mirror member B3 is attached such that the attachment posture and angle can be adjusted arbitrarily. As shown in FIG. 12, the mirror member B3 reflects the irradiation light from the projector apparatus main body B2 toward the display area 13a and the game area 12a.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the irradiation light emitted from the projector apparatus main body B2 and reflected by the mirror member B3 is applied to the uppermost decorative member 66A, the central decorative member 66B, and the lowermost decorative member 66C. Reach. The projection distance of the irradiation light traveling from the projector apparatus main body B2 to the decoration member 66A is La, the projection distance of the irradiation light traveling from the projector apparatus main body B2 to the decoration member 66B is Lb, and the irradiation proceeds from the projector apparatus main body B2 to the decoration member 66C. When the light projection distance is Lc, La <Lb <Lc.

  Further, the projection angle with respect to the vertical axis Y of the irradiation light traveling from the projector apparatus body B2 to the decoration member 66A is θ1, the projection angle with respect to the vertical axis Y of the irradiation light traveling from the projector apparatus body B2 to the decoration member 66B, and the projector When the projection angle with respect to the vertical axis Y of the irradiation light traveling from the apparatus main body B2 to the decorative member 66C is θ3, θ3 <θ2 <θ1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, the projection angle with respect to the optical axis X of the irradiation light traveling from the projector apparatus main body B2 to the decoration member 66A is α, and the light of the irradiation light traveling from the projector apparatus main body B2 to the decoration member 66B. When the projection angle with respect to the axis X is β and the projection angle with respect to the optical axis X of the irradiation light traveling from the projector apparatus main body B2 to the decorative member 66C is γ, α≈β <γ.

  The incident light with respect to the front surface (generally vertical surface) of the game board 12 increases as the projection distance increases, and the apparent irradiation area increases even at the same luminous intensity, and the luminance tends to decrease. It becomes. Thereby, the brightness | luminance of irradiation light is large in order of the decoration member 66A of the uppermost part, the decoration member 66B of the center part, and the decoration member 66C of the lowest part, considering only the projection distances La, Lb, and Lc. It becomes a trend.

  In addition, the irradiation light from the projector apparatus main body B2 tends to decrease in luminance because the apparent irradiation area increases as the projection angle with respect to the vertical axis Y and the projection angle with respect to the optical axis X increase. Accordingly, the brightness of the irradiated light is, for example, considering the projection angles θ1 to θ3, α, β, and γ, for example, the uppermost decorative member 66A, the central decorative member 66B, and the lowermost decorative member 66C. The brightness of the irradiated light tends to increase.

  In the present embodiment, the projector unit B emits irradiation light with a uniform amount of light, while the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C, the reel accessory 67, and the LEDs of the movable accessory 68 are When an image is projected by the irradiation light from the projector unit B, the luminance of light emission of the LED is appropriately adjusted by dimming control, or controlled so that the LED is turned off. The irradiation light from the projector unit B also reaches the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. When an image is projected by the irradiation light with the display area 13a as a projection target, a part of the display area 13a is displayed. Alternatively, the entire area is controlled to be black or gray suitable for projection, or the liquid crystal display device 13 is turned off to control the display area 13a to be black. These controls will be described later.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as the gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 70 described later, a non-probability / non-short-time gaming state (a normal gaming state that is non-probabilistic and non-short-time) and a winning probability of special symbol lottery And the normal symbol lottery win probability is higher than the non-probability / non-short-time game state, the probability change / short-time game state (the game state that is probabilistic and short-time), and only the normal symbol lottery win probability is non-probable / non-time-short game state If there is a non-probability change / short-time game state (non-probability and short-time game state) that is higher than those, and a special symbol lottery is won in these game states, it shifts to a big hit game state (special game). Further, the gaming state may shift to the small hit gaming state based on the result of the special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, there is no probability variation / non-time saving gaming state (a gaming state that is both probability variation and non-time saving), but a probability variation / non-time saving gaming state may be provided.

  In the short-time gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is in a high probability state, so that the winning to the second starting port 45 is facilitated by the support of the ordinary electric accessory 46. This state is a so-called “electric support”, and it becomes easy to store a reserved ball of a special symbol game, which will be described later, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the game ball by winning the second start opening 45. Specifically, the short-time gaming state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time-short gaming state 1), a state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (short-time gaming state 2). ), Which means at least one of the states in which the normal electric-powered object 46 is released for a relatively long time (short-time gaming state 3). For example, the short-time gaming state includes a state in which the short-time gaming state 1, the short-time gaming state 2, and the short-time gaming state 3 proceed simultaneously with any combination. In such a short time gaming state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit gaming state is improved.

  In the big hit gaming state, after the big hit gaming state having succeeded in the so-called V winning, the transition to the probability variation / short time gaming state is surely made, and the non-probability variation / non-time saving gaming state is not made. On the other hand, if the big hit gaming state is finished without succeeding in the V winning (also referred to as non-V winning), the game state is shifted to a gaming state that is a non-probable variable gaming state and a short-time gaming state after the big winning gaming state is finished. It is like that.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot gaming state ends, for example, in the probability change / short-time gaming state, 190 special symbol lotteries (190 special symbol variation display or stop display) are performed. It shifts to the probabilistic and non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state, for example, 100 times or 4 times of special symbol lottery (100 times or 4 times of special symbol variation display or stop display) was performed in the non-probability change and short-time gaming state , It is designed to shift to a non-probabilistic and non-time-saving gaming state. It should be noted that the probabilistic / short-time gaming state may be maintained until the next jackpot gaming state is entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. Note that the probability variation gaming state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lotteries as in the present embodiment is also referred to as an ST (Specia1 Time) gaming state.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the configuration of various circuits provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a main control circuit 70 that mainly controls gaming operations, a payout / launch control circuit 123, and a sub-control circuit 200 that controls effects according to the progress of the game. (Production control means).

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 70 includes a one-chip microcomputer 77, a clock generation circuit 74, and an initial reset circuit 75. As described above, in the present embodiment, a special symbol lottery process is performed when the first start port 44 or the second start port 45 is won. This process is controlled by the main control circuit 70. That is, the main control circuit 70 also serves as means (lottery means) for performing a lottery process for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state to a state advantageous to the player.

  The one-chip microcomputer 77 includes a main CPU 71, a main ROM 72, a main RAM 73, and a serial communication unit 76. The main CPU 71, the main ROM 72, the main RAM 73, and the serial communication unit 76 may be provided separately.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration in which the main ROM 72 is built in the substrate of the main control circuit 70 will be described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a ROM board on which the main ROM 72 is mounted may be connected to the board of the main control circuit 70. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, various circuits in the main control circuit 70 may be formed integrally or separately. Further, the main ROM 72 may not be configured to be installed in the gaming machine, but may be configured to be able to communicate with the gaming machine.

  A clock generation circuit 74 and an initial reset circuit 75 are connected to the one-chip microcomputer 77. The main ROM 72 stores various programs for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 71, various data tables, and the like.

  The main CPU 71 executes various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 72. The main RAM 73 functions as a temporary storage area when the main CPU 71 executes various processes, and stores various flags and variable values necessary for the main CPU 71 for various processes. In this embodiment, the main RAM 73 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 71. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium can be used as a temporary storage area as long as it is a readable / writable storage medium. .

  The clock generation circuit 74 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec) in order to execute a system timer interrupt process to be described later. The initial reset circuit 75 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on. Then, the serial communication unit 76 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, various devices that operate in accordance with the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70 are connected to the main control circuit 70.

  Specifically, a special symbol display device 61, a normal symbol display device 62, a normal symbol hold display device 63, a first special symbol hold display device 64, and a second special symbol hold display device 65 are connected to the main control circuit 70. The Each of these devices performs a predetermined operation based on the output signal sent from the main control circuit 70. For example, when a predetermined output signal is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the special symbol display device 61, the special symbol display device 61 performs operation control of variable symbol special display in the special symbol game based on the output signal. Do.

  The main control circuit 70 is connected to a normal electric accessory solenoid 46a, a first big prize opening solenoid 53b, and a second big prize opening solenoid 54b. Then, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 46a to bring the pair of blade members of the ordinary electric accessory 46 into an open state or a closed state. Further, the main control circuit 70 drives and controls the first big prize opening solenoid 53b and the second big prize opening solenoid 54b, respectively, so that the first big prize opening 53 and the second big prize opening 54 are opened or closed. To do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14, the main control circuit 70 is connected to various sensors and receives output signals from the various sensors. Specifically, the main control circuit 70 is connected with count sensors 53c and 54c, general winning ball sensors 51a and 52a, a passing ball sensor 43a, a first starting port winning ball sensor 44a, a second starting port winning ball sensor 45a, and the like. Is done.

  The count sensor 53 c counts the game balls that have won the first grand prize opening 53 and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The count sensor 54 c counts the game balls that have won the second grand prize opening 54, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the result to the main control circuit 70. The general winning ball sensor 51 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins in the general winning slot 51, and the general winning ball sensor 52 a wins a game ball in the general winning slot 52. In this case, a predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70.

  The passing ball sensor 43 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball passes through the ball passing detector 43. The first start port winning ball sensor 44 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when a game ball wins the first start port 44. The second start opening winning ball sensor 45 a outputs a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 70 when the game ball wins the second starting opening 45. Further, a backup clear switch (not shown) is connected to the main control circuit 70, and this backup clear switch is used when the backup data is cleared in response to an operation by a game store administrator or the like at the time of power interruption. The predetermined detection signal is output to the main control circuit 70 and the payout / launch control circuit 123.

  Further, a payout / launch control circuit 123 is connected to the main control circuit 70. The contents of the payout / launch control circuit 123 and various peripheral devices connected thereto will be described in detail later.

[Discharge / Launch Control Circuit and its Peripherals]
The payout / firing control circuit 123 is connected to the prize ball case unit 170, the payout state notification display device 178, the lower pan full switch 179, the firing device 15, the external terminal board 140, and the card unit 150. The external terminal board 140 is connected to the data display 141, and the card unit 150 is connected to the lending operation unit 151.

  Based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70, the payout / launch control circuit 123 inputs and outputs signals and the like to these peripheral devices, and controls the operation of each peripheral device. For example, the payout / launch control circuit 123 receives a prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 70 and a lending ball control signal to be described later transmitted from the card unit 150, and gives a predetermined ball to the prize ball case unit 170. Send a signal. Thereby, the prize ball case unit 170 pays out a game ball.

  The prize ball case unit 170 is a device for paying out game balls. The first 15-ball collateral switch 172a, the second 15-ball collateral switch 172b, the first counting switch 181a, the second counting switch 181b, and the payout A motor 174 is included. Note that these components included in the prize ball case unit 170 are connected to the payout / firing control circuit 123, respectively.

  Although not shown here, two ball supply passages are provided inside the prize ball case unit 170. Then, the first 15-ball collateral switch 172a detects a game ball supplied to one of the ball supply passages, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123. The second 15-ball collateral switch 172b detects a game ball replenished in the other ball supply passage, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123.

  Further, although not shown here, two payout passages are provided inside the prize ball case unit 170. Then, the first counting switch 181 a detects a game ball paid out to one payout passage, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123. The second counting switch 181b detects the game ball paid out to the other payout passage, and outputs a predetermined output signal indicating the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123.

  The payout motor 174 is composed of a stepping motor and is driven according to a control signal input from the payout / firing control circuit 123. The payout motor 174 rotationally drives a sprocket (rotating member) (not shown) provided in the prize ball case unit 170. Then, by the rotation of the sprocket, the game balls accumulated in each ball supply path move one by one to the corresponding payout passage.

  The payout state notification display device 178 is a device for notifying the type of abnormality when an abnormality occurs with respect to the payout of the game ball, and is configured by a 7-segment display. The payout state notification display device 178 is attached at a position where only the administrator of the game store (game room) can visually recognize, for example, at a predetermined location on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  When the game ball stored in the lower plate 22 becomes full, the lower plate full tank switch 179 detects this and outputs the detection result to the payout / launch control circuit 123.

  When the signal indicating that the lower pan is full is input from the lower pan full switch 179, the payout / launch control circuit 123 displays the payout state notification display device 178 indicating that the lower pan is full. And a signal indicating that the lower pan is full is output to the main control circuit 70. Thereafter, when an effect control command is transmitted from the main control circuit 70 to the sub control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 200 uses the speaker 11, the lamp / LED group 18, the liquid crystal display device 13, and the like to fill the lower plate 22. Informs that it is in the tongue state.

  The launching device 15 has a launching handle 25 that can be turned by the player when the game ball stored in the upper plate 21 is launched into the game area 12a. When the firing handle 25 is gripped by the player and operated to rotate in the clockwise direction, the payout / firing control circuit 123 applies a solenoid actuator (not shown) of the launching device 15 according to the rotational angle. Supply power. Thereby, the launching device 15 launches a game ball. Note that a motor may be used instead of the solenoid actuator as the driving means of the launching device 15.

  The external terminal board 140 is used to transmit data to a hall computer that manages all pachinko gaming machines in the game store. The data display 141 is installed, for example, as an ancillary facility of a game store in the upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and has a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of hits.

  When operated by the player, the lending operation unit 151 outputs a signal requesting lending of game balls to the card unit 150. The card unit 150 determines the number of game balls to be paid out via the prize ball case unit 170 (the number of loaned balls) based on a signal for requesting the rental of game balls output from the lending operation unit 151. When the card unit 150 receives a signal requesting lending of game balls from the lending operation unit 151, the card unit 150 transmits a lending ball control signal including information on the determined lending ball number to the payout / launch control circuit 123.

[Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 200 performs various controls in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 70, and includes a sub CPU 81, a program ROM 82, a work RAM 83, a command input port 84, a real time clock (hereinafter referred to as “ RTC: Real-Time Clock ”) 85, a display control circuit 86, an audio control circuit 87, a lamp control circuit 88, a rendering operation control circuit 89, and a projector control circuit 90. The liquid crystal display device 13 is connected to the display control circuit 86. A speaker 11 is connected to the audio control circuit 87. A lamp / LED group 18 is connected to the lamp control circuit 88. To the effect operation control circuit 89, a reel accessory 67 and a movable accessory 68 are connected as an accessory effect device. A projector device main body B2 is connected to the projector control circuit 90.

  The sub CPU 81 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with programs stored in the program ROM 82. The liquid crystal display device 13 functions as a display unit. In particular, the sub CPU 81 controls the entire sub control circuit 200 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 70.

  The program ROM 82 stores programs and various tables for the sub CPU 81 to mainly control various effects.

  The work RAM 83 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 81.

  The command input port 84 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 and transmits them to the sub CPU 81.

  The RTC 85 inputs a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time to the sub CPU 81. The RTC 85 normally operates with power from the gaming machine body when power is supplied to the gaming machine body, and when the gaming machine body is powered off, the RTC 85 is a backup power source mounted on a power supply board (not shown). Operates with power supplied from As a result, the RTC 85 can time the current date and time even when the gaming machine body is turned off. The RTC 85 may be operated by a battery provided on the sub control circuit. As an alternative to the RTC 85, a counter provided in a work RAM having a function as a backup RAM may be used as a means for measuring time by counting up every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms).

  The display control circuit 86 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 13 in accordance with the data supplied from the sub CPU 81. For example, the display control circuit 86 generates an image data processor (VDP) and various image data. The image data ROM is configured to store data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 86 is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  The display control circuit 86 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 in the frame buffer in accordance with an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 81. Examples of the image data include decorative design image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

  The display control circuit 86 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to a D / A converter (not shown) at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 13 at a predetermined timing. A liquid crystal image is displayed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The sound control circuit 87 is for performing control related to sound generated from the speaker 11, and for example, a sound source IC that performs control related to sound, a sound data ROM that stores various sound data, and amplifying sound signals. Amplifier (AMP). The configuration of the voice control circuit 87 is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 11 and selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in accordance with a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 81. can do.

  The sound source IC reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a predetermined sound signal, and supplies the sound signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the sound signal and generates sound from the speaker 11.

  The lamp control circuit 88 is for controlling the lamp / LED group 18 including the LEDs of the decoration members 66A, 66B, and 66C, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, and a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns. Is composed of a decoration data ROM or the like in which is stored. The configuration of the lamp control circuit 88 is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  The effect operation control circuit 89 controls an effect operation such as, for example, operating the movable accessory 68 by operating the effect button 23 or the like during the effective period of the operation in the big hit gaming state.

  The projector control circuit 90 is for performing LED control, focus control, image processing, and the like of the projector apparatus main body B2. As shown in FIG. 15, the projector apparatus body B2 includes a projector control circuit 90, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components.

  The sub control circuit 200 is connected to the projector apparatus main body B2 via the relay substrate CK. The sub control circuit 200 controls the projector control circuit 90 according to the rendering operation of the reel accessory 67, the movable accessory 68, etc., and projects the irradiation light toward the front surface of the game board 12 via the optical mechanism B24. Thus, the video is displayed as a visual effect.

  The optical mechanism B24 is an LED light source that emits light of each color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), DMD, and a projection lens of the lens unit as components disposed around the lens unit (not shown). Is provided with a focus mechanism (not shown) for performing focus adjustment.

  The projector control circuit 90 includes a control LSI 230, an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231, a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232, and an LED driver 233.

  The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 to project the irradiation light based on the command from the sub control circuit 200. The control LSI 230 performs focus adjustment when projecting the irradiation light by controlling the focus mechanism and moving the projection lens (not shown) in the optical axis direction based on a command from the sub-control circuit 200. The EEPROM 231 stores a control program by the control LSI 230 and data related to setting / adjustment of the projector apparatus main body B2.

  The DLP system of the projector apparatus main body B2 mainly includes a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver, and an LED light source and DMD of the optical mechanism B24.

  Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected by the DMD in a predetermined direction proceeds to a lens unit (not shown), passes through a projection lens (not shown), enters the mirror member B3, and finally becomes a mirror. By being reflected by the member B3, it is guided to the front surface of the game board 12. Thereby, irradiation light is projected with respect to the reel accessory 67, the movable accessory 68, etc. which become projection objects, and the image | video according to the production is formed.

  In the present embodiment, the projector apparatus body B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector apparatus body B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by turning back the irradiation light by the mirror member B3, and makes the projection distance of the irradiation light as short as possible, for example, by setting the contrast ratio to 1000: 1. I have to. As a result, the projector unit B including the projector apparatus main body B2 is configured to be cheaper and smaller, and is easily accommodated in a limited space inside the upper decoration unit 40.

[Communication operation of control circuit]
Next, communication operations among the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200, the sound / lamp control circuits 87 and 88, the display control circuit 86, and the projector control circuit 90 will be described with reference to FIG. The voice / lamp control circuits 87 and 88 are simply the voice control circuit 87 and the lamp control circuit 88 described together, but these circuits may actually be integrally formed.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the main control circuit 70 supplies various commands to the sub control circuit 200. The sub-control circuit 200 receives various commands from the main control circuit 70, selects a type of effect according to the command, and based on the selected effect, each effect device (for example, decoration members 66A, 66B, 66C, role The control data of the reel effector 67, the movable accessory 68, the liquid crystal display device 13 and the projector device main body B2 as the product effect device is selected, and the control data to be transmitted to each effect device is set in a predetermined area of the work RAM 83. .

  The sub control circuit 200 controls the operations of the accessory effect devices 67 and 68 based on the control data for each effect device. The sub-control circuit 200 transmits a lamp request for controlling the lamp / LED group 18 and a sound request for driving and controlling the speaker 11 to the sound / lamp control circuits 87 and 88, and the liquid crystal display device 13. A drawing request for controlling the projector and a drawing request for controlling the projector apparatus main body B2 are transmitted to the projector control circuit 90. Accordingly, the operations of the effect rendering devices 67 and 68 are controlled by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200, the light emission operation of the lamp / LED group 18 is controlled by the lamp control circuit 88, and the sound output operation of the speaker 11 is controlled by sound. Controlled by the circuit 87, the image display operation of the liquid crystal display device 13 is controlled by the display control circuit 86, and the video output operation of the projector apparatus main body B 2 is controlled by the projector control circuit 90.

[Process by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main control circuit main processing]
FIGS. 17 and 18 are flowcharts showing main control circuit main processing executed by the main CPU 71. This main control circuit main process is executed in units of the following steps. As shown in FIG. 17, in S10, the main CPU 71 performs a watchdog timer disable setting process. If this process ends, the process moves to S11.

  In S11, the main CPU 71 performs input / output port setting processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  In S <b> 12, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in a power interruption detection state. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power interruption detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is set, and the process proceeds to S12. If the power interruption detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power interruption detection state is not set, and the process proceeds to S13. Move.

  In S13, the main CPU 71 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 200 receives a signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S14.

  In S <b> 14, the main CPU 71 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  In S15, the main CPU 71 performs processing for determining whether or not the backup clear switch is ON. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that the backup clear switch is ON, it moves the process to S24, and if it determines that the backup clear switch is not ON, it moves the process to S16.

  In S16, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power interruption detection flag. In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S17 when it is determined that there is a power interruption detection flag, and shifts the process to S24 when it is determined that there is no power interruption detection flag.

  In S <b> 17, the main CPU 71 performs a process of checking the work area for damage and calculating a work damage check value. If this process ends, the process moves to S18.

  In S18, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, the process proceeds to S19. When the main CPU 71 determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S24. .

  In S19, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting 7FFEH to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S20.

  In S20, the main CPU 71 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. If this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  In S21, the main CPU 71 performs a high probability gaming state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 71 causes a display to notify that the winning probability of the big hit is a high probability state in the case of the probability variation gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S22. Note that the notification display may be configured to end at the start or end of the first fluctuation after power-on.

  In S22, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption to the sub-control circuit 200. If this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S <b> 23, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 71. When this process is completed, the main CPU 71 returns to the address before the power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter returned from the stack area.

  In S24, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting 8000H to the stack pointer. If this process ends, the process moves to S25.

  In S25, the main CPU 71 performs a process of acquiring an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S26.

  In S26, the main CPU 71 performs all work area clear processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S27 in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 18, in S27, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. If this process ends, the process moves to S28.

  In S28, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting processing of the work area at the time of initialization of the RAM. If this process ends, the process moves to S29.

  In S <b> 29, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a command for initializing the main RAM 73 to the sub-control circuit 200. In the sub control circuit 200, initialization is executed based on the command received by the sub CPU 81. If this process ends, the process moves to S30.

  In S30, the main CPU 71 performs initial setting of CPU peripheral devices. If this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, the main CPU 71 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process for prohibiting the interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  In S32, the main CPU 71 performs initial value random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, the main CPU 71 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process for permitting an interrupt process. If this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S <b> 34, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the effect random number. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. If this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S35, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 71 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 73. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S36, and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If not, the process moves to S31.

  In S 36, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In S37, the main CPU 71 performs timer update processing. In this processing, the main CPU 71 measures a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 70 and the sub-control circuit 200, and the opening time of the big winning opening that is opened when a big hit or a small hit occurs. Grand prize opening time timer, security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 71 to the hall computer or the like via the external terminal board 140 when it is detected that an illegal operation has occurred The process of updating various timers is executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  In S38, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 71 extracts a winning determination random value and a winning symbol determination random value in accordance with detection signals from the first starting opening winning ball sensor 44 a and the second starting opening winning ball sensor 45 a and stores them in the main ROM 72. With reference to the big hit determination table (not shown), it is determined whether or not a special symbol lottery (big lot and small lottery lottery) has been won, and the result of determination is stored in the main RAM 73. This special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  In S39, the main CPU 71 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts the normal symbol determination random number value and the normal symbol determination random number value in accordance with the detection signal from the passing ball sensor 43 a, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random number value and the main ROM 72. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won based on the normal symbol winning table (not shown), and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determining random number value, and the normal symbol determining table stored in the main ROM 72 are determined. Based on (not shown), it is determined whether to make a lost figure or a winning symbol, and a process of storing the result of the determination is performed. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if not winning, the determination result indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the determination result indicating the winning symbol is stored, the ordinary electric accessory 46 opens and closes according to a predetermined opening / closing pattern. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the ordinary electric accessory 46 is opened, and when the ordinary electric accessory 46 is in an open state, it becomes easy to win a game ball at the second start opening 45. If this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, the main CPU 71 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 71 sends a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display device 13 to the main RAM 73 in accordance with the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 73 in S38 and S39. The process to memorize is performed. The main CPU 71 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display device 61 and the normal symbol display device 62. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display device 62 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and stops based on the received control signal. If this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  In S41, the main CPU 71 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of generating game information data related to a game information signal to be transmitted to the hall computer or the data display 141 and storing it in the main RAM 73. This game information data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S42.

  In S42, the main CPU 71 performs symbol reservation number data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 detects the first start port detected in the special symbol related switch check process and the normal symbol related switch check process (S241 and S242 in FIG. 31) in the switch input process of the system timer interrupt process described later. Number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 73 that is updated in accordance with the detection signals from the winning ball sensor 44a, the second starting opening winning ball sensor 45a, and the passing ball sensor 43a, and the change display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. Based on the update result, the main RAM 73 stores a control signal for driving the first special symbol hold display device 64, the second special symbol hold display device 65, and the normal symbol hold display device 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  In S43, the main CPU 71 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of outputting the control signal stored in the main RAM 73 by each process described above from each port. Specifically, the main CPU 71 outputs a security signal to the hall computer or the like via the external terminal board 140 and turns on the LED power source (common signal), the shutter 53a and the second of the first grand prize opening 53. Solenoid power is supplied to drive the solenoid that opens and closes the shutter 54a of the special winning opening 54 and opens and closes the ordinary electric accessory 46. This port output processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  In S <b> 44, the main CPU 71 performs a winning mouth related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process for controlling a winning opening related command. If this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  In S45, the main CPU 71 performs a payout process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 44, the second start port 45, the first grand prize port 53, the second major prize port 54, and the general prize ports 50, 51. When a check is made and there is a winning, a payout request command corresponding to each is sent to the payout / launch control circuit 123. If this process ends, the process moves to S31.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol control process is executed in units of the following steps. In FIG. 19, the numerical values shown on the sides of S <b> 51 to S <b> 58 indicate control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the control state flag storage area in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 73. As a result, the special symbol game proceeds.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the first S50, the main CPU 71 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 71 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S51.

  In S51 to S58, which will be described later, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in S51 to S58 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 71 executes processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined in accordance with a waiting time timer set for each step. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the main CPU 71 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 71 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

  In S51, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol storage check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S52.

  In S52, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol variation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 71 uses the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management as the control state flag when the control state flag is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management. Set the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 600 ms) in the waiting time timer. In other words, after the waiting time after determination has elapsed, the setting of S53 is executed. The special symbol variation time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S53.

  In S53, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management and the waiting time after determination has elapsed. In the case of big hit or small hit, the main CPU 71 sets a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. In other words, after the time corresponding to the hit start interval elapses, the process of S54 is set to be executed. On the other hand, the main CPU 71 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit or a small hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S58. The special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S54.

  In S54, the main CPU 71 executes a hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the second big prize read from the main ROM 72 when the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management and the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. Drive control data related to a round opening / closing pattern for opening the shutter 54 a of the mouth 54 is stored in the main RAM 73. Then, in the process of S43 in FIG. 18, the main CPU 71 reads out drive control data related to a round opening / closing pattern for opening the shutter 54a of the second big prize opening 54 stored in the main RAM 73, and the second big prize opening. A signal for opening / closing the shutter 54a is supplied to the second big prize opening solenoid 54b. As a result, the main CPU 71 performs opening / closing control of the second big prize opening 54. In other words, a hit gaming state is executed in which one round game provided with a predetermined advantageous gaming state is repeated a predetermined number of times. The hit start interval management process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S55. In this case, a small hit gaming state in which only the second big prize opening 54 is opened and closed only once may be executed. In the present embodiment, the second big prize opening 54 is always opened and closed first, but the first big prize opening 53 may be opened and closed first, or the first The big prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54 may be arbitrarily selected and opened / closed.

  In S55, the main CPU 71 executes a special winning opening opening process. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (04H) indicating that the big winning opening is open in the control state flag, and sets the upper opening limit time in the big winning opening timer. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S56.

  In S56, the main CPU 71 executes a waiting time management process before the special winning opening is opened. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before the big winning opening and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds (interval pattern x, y) has elapsed. The winning opening opening number counter is stored and updated so as to increase by “1”. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a value (04H) indicating that the big winning opening is open in the control state flag, and sets the upper opening limit time in the big winning opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S55 again. The waiting time management process before the big prize opening is described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S57.

  In S57, the main CPU 71 executes a hit end interval process. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game to the control state when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S58. The hit end interval process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S58.

  In S58, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S51. The special symbol game end process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is finished, the special symbol control process routine is finished.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, when the main CPU 71 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 71 sets the control status flag to (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is lost. ), (07H) in order, the processing of S51, S52, S53, and S58 shown in FIG. 19 is executed at a predetermined timing. When the main CPU 71 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 71 sets the control status flag to (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is a big hit or small hit. ) In order, the processing of S51, S52, and S53 shown in FIG. 19 is executed at a predetermined timing, and control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 71 sets the control state flags in order of (03H), (04H), (05H), and FIG. The processes of S54, S55, and S56 shown are executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. When the end condition of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is satisfied, the processing of S55, S57, and S58 shown in FIG. 19 is performed by setting (04H), (06H), and (07H) in this order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol memory check process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in S60, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the process proceeds to S61. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, this special symbol storage check processing routine is terminated.

  In S <b> 61, the main CPU 71 performs a process for determining the presence or absence of the start memory. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines that there is no special symbol game start memory, that is, the first special symbol start memory area (0) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) or the second special symbol start memory. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S62. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that there is a start-up memory, the process proceeds to S63.

  In S62, the main CPU 71 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 73. Furthermore, the state in which the special symbol game start memory (the first special symbol start memory area or the second special symbol start memory area in which the random number for hit determination is stored) is “0” for a predetermined time (for example, 30 s) If it is maintained, a value that permits execution of the demonstration display is set as the demonstration display permission value. Then, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demonstration display command stored in this way is supplied as a demonstration display command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. As a result, the demonstration display is executed in the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13. In addition, a video for demonstration display is projected from the projector apparatus main body B2 to the front surface of the game board 12. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

  In S63, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start storage corresponding to the second special symbol start storage area is “0”. That is, if it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process proceeds to S64. When it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not “0”, that is, the data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S65 Move processing to.

  In S <b> 64, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is changed as a change state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S66.

  In S <b> 65, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (01 </ b> H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol as a variation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S66.

  In S66, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management as a control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S67.

  In S67, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol memory transfer process. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 71 converts each of the data from the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) to the first special symbol start memory area (1). A process of shifting (storing) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3), and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data in (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. To do. If this process ends, the process moves to S68.

  In S68, the main CPU 71 executes a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (jackpot determination values) that are jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game state flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select a judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the high probability jackpot determination table having a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the gaming state flag is not a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability changing gaming state with a small number is referred. As described above, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating the probability variation gaming state, that is, when the gaming state is a probability variation gaming state as a gaming state that easily shifts to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), the transition to the big hit gaming state is made. The probability of performing is improved as compared with the non-probability changing gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the big hit gaming state than the probability changing gaming state.

  Then, the main CPU 71 is used for determining whether or not the special symbol start storage area is extracted in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). The random number value and the selected jackpot determination table are referred to. Then, the main CPU 71 determines that it is a big hit when the random number for hit determination and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to enter a big hit gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Note that the jackpot probability due to winning in the first starting port 44 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability due to winning in the second starting port 45. The big hit probability due to winning in the first starting port 44 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the big hit probability due to winning in the second starting port 45.

  Thus, in the process of S68, either the big hit or the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S69.

  In S69, the main CPU 71 executes the small hit determination process when it is determined that the big hit is not won in the big hit determination process in S68. In this process, the main CPU 71 selects a small hit determination table that defines a determination value (small hit determination value) that is a small hit regardless of the gaming state flag.

  Then, the main CPU 71 extracts the special symbol starting storage area random number value extracted in the second special symbol starting storage area (0), which is extracted when the game ball is won, and the selected small hit determination table. refer. Then, the main CPU 71 determines that it is a small hit when the hit determination random number value matches the small hit determination value.

  In addition, since the small hit can occur only in the second special symbol, the small hit determination processing is performed only based on the random number value for the hit determination stored in the second special symbol start storage area. You may make it perform a small hit determination process based on the random number value for a hit determination memorize | stored in the 1 special symbol starting storage area.

  As described above, in the process of S69, either the small hit or the loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and the special symbol is determined when both the big hit determination process of S68 and the small hit determination process of S69 are not won. Loss is determined as a game determination result. If this process ends, the process moves to S70.

  In S70, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol determination process. In this processing, the main CPU 71 determines the big hit symbol when the big hit determination result is a big hit win, and determines the small hit symbol when the big hit determination result is a small hit win, for either the big hit or the small hit. If it is lost, a process of determining a lost symbol is performed. The special symbol determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S71.

  In S71, the main CPU 71 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 differs based on the special symbol determined in the process of S70, the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S68 and S69, and the value of the probability variation counter. A variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern is selected. Then, the main CPU 71 determines a variation pattern based on the rendering condition determination random value extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. Here, the probability variation gaming state and the normal gaming state have different variation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 71 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 61 based on the data indicated by the variation pattern.

  The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the special symbol display device 61. As a result, the special symbol display device 61 variably displays the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a variation pattern designation command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. The sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 executes an effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. If this process ends, the process moves to S72.

  In S72, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for the present variation display. If this process ends, the process moves to S73.

  In S <b> 73, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect start command in the main RAM 73. The special symbol effect start command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. Sub CPU81 will start production based on the received special symbol production start command. If this process ends, the process moves to S74.

  In S74, the main CPU 71 executes processing for clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the current variable display. When this process is finished, the special symbol memory check process routine is finished.

[Special symbol determination processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol determination process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 21, in S90, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S91. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S96.

  In S91, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the jackpot variation state number determined in S90 is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S92 when the change state number is a value (01H) indicating that the change is the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the fluctuation state number is not a value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is a fluctuation of the first special symbol, that is, the fluctuation state number is a value (02H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is a fluctuation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process proceeds to S94.

  In S92, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random number value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is shifted based on the big symbol determination random number extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the big hit determination table. If this process ends, the process moves to S93.

  In S93, the main CPU 71 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set of the determined first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays the first special symbol, and stops and displays the first special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command for the big hit symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 71 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 in a big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S99.

  In S94, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining a big hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining one of the big special symbols of the second special symbol based on the random number for determining the big symbol and the big hit determination table extracted from the big hit symbol determining counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S95.

  In step S95, the main CPU 71 performs a big hit symbol data set and a big hit symbol command set for the determined second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the big hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a big special symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 71 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 in a big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S99.

  In S96, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the result determined in the small hit determination process (S69 in FIG. 20) is a win for the small hit. In this process, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S97 when the small win is won. On the other hand, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S101 when it is not the small win.

  In S97, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining the small bonus symbol of the second special symbol based on the random symbol value for determining the winning symbol extracted from the jackpot symbol determining counter and the small hit determination table. If this process ends, the process moves to S98.

  In S98, the main CPU 71 performs a data set for the small hit symbol of the determined second special symbol and a command set for the small hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the small hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and stops and displays the second special symbol in a manner based on the big hit symbol data of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a command for the small special symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 71 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 in the small hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S99.

  In S99, the main CPU 71 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S100.

  In S100, the main CPU 71 performs a special winning opening opening number related data set process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines the data related to the number of times of opening the first prize winning opening 53 and the second prize winning opening 54, that is, the winning symbol based on the first special symbol or the winning symbol based on the second special symbol. A process of setting data corresponding to the symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 73 is performed. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines in S101 that it is neither big hit in S90 nor small hit in S96, that is, it is a loss, it performs a lost symbol data set and a lost symbol command set. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the lost symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it to the special symbol display device 61. The special symbol display device 61 variably displays the special symbol, and stops and displays the special symbol in a manner based on the loss symbol data of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 71 sets a lost symbol command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73 and supplies it as a special symbol designation command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. Under the control of the sub-control circuit 200, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 13a of the liquid crystal display device 13 in a manner of disabling display. When this process is finished, the special symbol determination process routine is finished.

[Special symbol change time management processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in S110, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol variation time management. If the main CPU 71 determines that the value indicates the special symbol variation time management (01H), it moves the process to S111. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that the value is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

  In S111, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is “0”. When determining that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S112. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not “0”, the special symbol variation time management processing routine is terminated.

  In S112, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and moves the processing to S113.

  In S113, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 73. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied as a symbol stop command from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S114.

  In S <b> 114, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a post-confirmation waiting time in an area functioning as a waiting time timer in the main RAM 73. When this process is finished, the special symbol variation time management process routine is finished.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol display time management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in S120, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S121. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 71 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

  In S121, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display time management process is “0”. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S122. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S124.

  In S122, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 71 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S123. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that it is not a big hit, the special symbol display time management processing routine is terminated.

  In S123, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 71 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the gaming state flag. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

  In S <b> 124, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 71 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S131. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S125.

  In S125, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. The time-saving counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol fluctuation frequency) in the time-saving gaming state. When the value of the time reduction counter is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S130. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S126.

  In S126, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S127.

  In S127, the main CPU 71 determines again whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. When the value of the time reduction counter is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S128. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S130.

  In S128, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the time reduction count flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S129.

  In step S129, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a time reduction end command. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting (storing) a time saving end command indicating the end of the time saving gaming state in the main RAM 73. The short time end command is supplied as a command indicating the gaming state from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the end of the short time gaming state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S130. Although not particularly illustrated, the main CPU 71 performs the same process for the probability variation counter, and when the value of the probability variation counter is “0”, the probability variation count flag is cleared to indicate the end of the probability variation gaming state. A process for setting (storing) a probability change end command in the main RAM 73 is performed. The probability change end command is supplied as a command indicating a game state from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the end of the probability change game state.

  In S130, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the small hit. If the main CPU 71 determines that it is a small hit, it moves the process to S131. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S136.

  In S131, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S132.

  In S <b> 132, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S133.

  In S <b> 133, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting “FFH” in the main RAM 73 as the value of the special winning opening opening number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S134. Here, setting “FFH” as the value of the winning prize opening number counter corresponds to setting “−1”.

  In S <b> 134, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 73. The special symbol effect stop command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the stop of the special symbol effect. If this process ends, the process moves to S135.

  In S135, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a big hit or small hit winning start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this processing, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub control circuit 200 starts the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating a specific hit opening / closing pattern as well as the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. Based on the data indicating the hit opening / closing pattern included in the hit start display command, the sub CPU 81 determines an effect pattern in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

  In S136, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game as the control state flag of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S137.

  In S <b> 136, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a special symbol effect stop command in the main RAM 73. When this process is finished, the special symbol display time management process routine is finished.

[Period start interval management processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 71. This hit start interval management process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in S140, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S141. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the hit start interval management process (03H), the main CPU 71 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

  In S141, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is “0”. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S142. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

  In S142, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining a hit opening / closing pattern with reference to a hit type determination table (not shown). In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) data of a hit opening / closing pattern indicating a big winning opening / closing pattern corresponding to the type of the big winning symbol or the small winning symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 performs round control based on the hit opening / closing pattern corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol determined in S142. If this process ends, the process moves to S143.

  In S143, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting (storing) the big winning opening opening number counter upper limit value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73, and moves the processing to S144.

  In S144, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding “1” to the special winning opening opening number counter, and moves the process to S145.

  In S <b> 145, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value of a waiting time timer as a waiting time after confirmation of big hit or small hit in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S146.

  In S <b> 146, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting (storing) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this case, the display command during the opening of the special winning opening becomes data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. If this process ends, the process moves to S147.

  In S147, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening release process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S148.

  In S <b> 148, the main CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S149.

  In S <b> 149, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S150.

  In S <b> 150, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting data of the 1R round opening / closing pattern in the main RAM 73. The main CPU 71 performs round control based on the round opening / closing pattern set in S150. If this process ends, the process moves to S151.

  In S <b> 151, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the variables located in the main RAM 73 based on the data read from the main ROM 72 in order to open the first big prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54. The variables stored in this way will drive the first big prize opening solenoid 53b or the second big prize opening solenoid 54b to open the first big prize opening 53 or the second big prize opening 54. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends.

[Large winning opening process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening process executed by the main CPU 71. This special winning opening opening process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in S160, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening opening process. If the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the big prize opening process, the process proceeds to S161. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the big prize opening process, the main prize opening process routine is ended.

  In S161, the main CPU 71 executes a special winning opening / closing process according to the set round opening / closing pattern. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S162.

  In S162, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the big prize closing data. In this process, the main CPU 71 updates the variables located in the main RAM 73 based on the data read from the main ROM 72 in order to close the special winning opening. The variable stored in this way is to close the first big prize opening solenoid 53b or the second big prize opening solenoid 54b. If this process ends, the process moves to S163.

  In S163, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a small hit is made. If the main CPU 71 determines that it is a small hit, it moves the process to S168. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that it is not a small hit, it moves the process to S164.

  In S164, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of large winning opening (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 71 compares the value of the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 73 with the upper limit of the large winning opening number (rounds), and the value of the large winning opening number counter. It is determined whether or not is equal to or greater than the upper limit value of the number of times of winning the big winning opening. Here, the upper limit value of the number of times the special winning opening is opened is, for example, 16R. If the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening opening number, the process proceeds to S168. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value of the special winning opening number, the process proceeds to S165.

  In S165, the main CPU 71 refers to the special winning opening opening pattern table (not shown) and the interval time table (not shown), and determines the value of the waiting time timer as the closing time according to the interval pattern between the corresponding rounds. Processing for setting in the main RAM 73 is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S166.

  In S166, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating the waiting time question management process before opening the big winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S167.

  In S 167, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

  On the other hand, in S168, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S169.

  In S169, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S170.

  In S <b> 170, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting an interval end display command per special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The special symbol end interval display command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 as a command indicating the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When this process is finished, the special winning opening opening process routine is finished.

[Big prize opening and closing process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening / closing process executed by the main CPU 71. This special winning opening / closing process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in S180, the main CPU 71 refers to a special prize opening / closing pattern table (not shown) and performs a process of acquiring a round opening / closing pattern to be executed at present. If this process ends, the process moves to S181.

  In step S181, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a control order counter and a repetition count counter. The control order counter is a counter for specifying the control order of the basic opening / closing pattern included in the round opening / closing pattern. The repeat count counter is a counter for counting the number of times the basic open / close pattern is repeatedly executed. In the round opening / closing pattern, the control order and the number of repetitions are defined for each basic opening / closing pattern, and a numerical value indicating the final order among these control orders is defined as the initial value of the control order counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S182.

  In step S <b> 182, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the basic opening / closing pattern of the first control sequence and the number of repetitions in the main RAM 73. The number of repetitions is set in the repetition count counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S183.

  In S183, the main CPU 71 performs control for opening / closing the special winning opening based on the basic opening / closing pattern defined in the round opening / closing pattern. If this process ends, the process moves to S184.

  In S184, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the big prize winning prize counter is 10 or more. When the value of the big prize winning prize counter is 10 or more, the main CPU 71 ends the big prize opening / closing process routine. On the other hand, when the value of the big prize winning prize counter is not 10 or more (less than 10), the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S185.

  In S185, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to end the opening / closing control related to the current round. When the main CPU 71 ends the opening / closing control related to the current round, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S186. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 does not end the opening / closing control related to the current round, the main CPU 71 shifts the processing to S183.

  In S186, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the repeat count counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S187.

  In S187, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the repeat count counter is zero. When the value of the repeat count counter is 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S188. On the other hand, if the value of the repeat count counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S183.

  In S188, the main CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the control order counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S189.

  In S189, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the control order counter is zero. When the value of the control order counter is 0, the main CPU 71 ends the special winning opening / closing process routine. On the other hand, when the value of the control order counter is not 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S190.

  In S190, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the basic opening / closing pattern of the corresponding control order and the number of repetitions based on the value of the control order counter. When this process is finished, the special winning opening and closing process routine is finished.

[Question management process before opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the waiting time question management process before opening the big prize opening executed by the main CPU 71. This waiting time question management process before the special winning opening is opened is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 27, in S200, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before the big winning opening is opened. If the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before opening the big prize opening, the process proceeds to S201. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the waiting time question management process before opening the big winning opening, the main CPU 71 ends the waiting time management process routine before opening the big winning opening.

  In S201, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the interval time timer corresponding to the interval between rounds is “0”. When determining that the value of the interval time timer is “0”, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S202. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the interval time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends the waiting time question management processing routine before the special winning opening is opened.

  In S <b> 202, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening opening number counter in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S203.

  In S <b> 203, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the data of the corresponding round opening / closing pattern in the main RAM 73 based on the value of the big winning opening opening number counter and the large winning opening / closing pattern table (not shown). If this process ends, the process moves to S204.

  In S <b> 204, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) the display command data during the big prize opening opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. In this case, the display command data during opening of the special winning opening is data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open command data is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 as a special winning opening open display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S205.

  In S <b> 205, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening releasing process in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S206.

  In S206, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 71 determines that it is a big hit, it moves the process to S207. On the other hand, if the main CPU 71 determines that it is not a big hit, it moves the process to S208.

  In S <b> 207, the main CPU 71 performs a process of clearing the value of the big prize winning prize counter in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S208.

  In S <b> 208, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the big prize opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is finished, the waiting time question management process routine before the special winning opening is finished is finished.

[Hit end interval processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the hit end interval process executed by the main CPU 71. This hit end interval process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 28, in S210, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval process. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the hit end interval process (06H), the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S211. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value indicating the hit end interval process (06H), the main CPU 71 ends the hit end interval process routine.

  In S211, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S212. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 71 ends the hit end interval processing routine.

  In S212, the main CPU 71 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 73 in the special symbol control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S213.

  In S <b> 213, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol and drive control data corresponding to the gaming state in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. When this process is finished, the hit end interval process routine is finished.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol game end process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in S220, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 73 is a value (07H) indicating a special symbol game end process. When the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol game end process (07H), the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 71 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the special symbol game end process routine is ended.

  In S <b> 221, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 73 as a control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S221.

  In S222, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting an end command per special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting (storing) a special symbol end command indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 73. The special symbol end command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes the end of the special symbol game. When this process ends, the special symbol game end process routine ends.

[System timer interrupt processing by main CPU]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 71. This system timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps. The main CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the system timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. This system timer interrupt process is executed in response to clock pulses generated from the clock generation circuit 74 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms).

  As shown in FIG. 30, in S230, the main CPU 71 performs a register saving process. If this process ends, the process moves to S231.

  In S <b> 231, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 73. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process or the like) on the condition that the system timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). If this process ends, the process moves to S232.

  In S232, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 75. The initial reset circuit 75 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 75 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 75 is cleared, the main CPU 71 A system reset signal is output. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 75, the main CPU 71 enters a system reset state. If this process ends, the process moves to S233.

  In S233, the main CPU 71 performs a random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 71 updates random numbers such as a winning determination random number counter, a winning symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. The hit determination random number counter and the hit symbol determination random number counter are not fair if the update timing of the counter value is indefinite. Therefore, a fixed timing every 2 ms is required to ensure this. I am trying to update with. If this process ends, the process moves to S234.

  In S234, the main CPU 71 performs switch input processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not each sensor corresponding to each winning area has detected a winning. For example, when detecting a winning, the main CPU 71 sets “1 (ON)” to the bit corresponding to the winning area determined to have won. This switch input process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S235.

  In S235, the main CPU 71 performs fraud detection processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of detecting an unauthorized operation based on, for example, a vibration detection signal from a vibration detection sensor (not shown). If this process ends, the process moves to S236.

  In S236, the main CPU 71 performs a register restoration process. In this processing, the main CPU 71 performs processing for restoring the register to the address before the interrupt processing. When this process is finished, the system timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a switch input process executed by the main CPU 71. This switch input process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in S240, the main CPU 71 performs prize ball-related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not there is an input from the general winning ball sensors 51a and 52a, the first starting port winning ball sensor 44a, and the second starting port winning ball sensor 45a. When it is determined that there is an input from the general winning ball sensors 51a and 52a, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning ball counter is performed, and the first starting port winning ball sensor 44a or the second starting port winning ball sensor 45a is processed. When it is determined that there is an input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the start opening winning counter corresponding to each is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S241.

  In S241, the main CPU 71 performs a special symbol related switch check process. This special symbol related switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S242.

  In S242, the main CPU 71 performs a normal symbol related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not there is an input from the passing ball sensor 43a, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected. 4), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit, this process is terminated. If it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, the hit determination random number value is extracted from the hit determination random number counter of the normal symbol game, the hit determination random number value is further extracted from the hit symbol determination random number counter, and the normal RAM 73 normal Processing to store in the symbol storage area is performed. If this process ends, the process moves to S243.

  In S243, the main CPU 71 performs an abnormality-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a signal from an abnormality-related switch such as an opening / closing switch (not shown) of the glass door 4 is abnormal. For example, when it is detected that the glass door 4 is opened based on a signal from the opening / closing switch of the glass door 4, a process for notifying abnormality is performed, and if no abnormality is detected, the process goes to S244. Move processing.

  In S244, the main CPU 71 performs a firing-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process for controlling the firing operation based on, for example, a signal from the touch sensor of the launching device 15. When this process is finished, the switch input process routine is finished.

[Special design related switch check processing]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 71. This special symbol related switch check process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in S250, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not a winning of a game ball to the first starting port 44 is detected based on a detection signal from the first starting port winning ball sensor 44a. Process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port winning ball sensor 44a is “1 (ON)”. If the bit of the start opening prize detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S251. If the bit of the first opening opening prize detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S257. Move.

  In S251, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the special symbol related switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S252.

  In S252, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reservations of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S253.

  In S253, the main CPU 71 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. Then, the rendering condition determination random value is extracted from the rendering condition determination random number counter and stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 73.

  In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). The determination result based on the random number for determining the winning is derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and the various kinds obtained by winning the game ball at the first starting port 44 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). If this process ends, the process moves to S254.

  In S254, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S255.

  In S255, the main CPU 71 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to win a prize based on random lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S256.

  In S <b> 256, the main CPU 71 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The start winning command includes information indicating a winning determination random number and information indicating a winning symbol determining random number. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 71 of the main control circuit 70 to the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200, so that the sub control circuit 200 recognizes that a game ball has been won and the winning lottery result is determined. It becomes like this. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing an effect such as changing the display mode of the reserved ball that is displayed as a winning effect when it is determined that the winning effect is determined in the process of S255. As a result, a so-called “prefetching effect” in which an effect is executed based on the start-up memory before the execution of variation is possible. When this process ends, the special symbol related switch check processing routine ends.

  In S257, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a winning of a game ball to the second starting port 45 is detected based on a detection signal from the second starting port winning ball sensor 45a. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the bit of the second start opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start opening winning ball sensor 45a is “1 (ON)”. When the bit of the start opening prize detection counter is “1 (ON)”, the process proceeds to S258, and when the bit of the second start opening prize detection counter is not “1 (ON)”, the special symbol related The switch check processing routine is terminated.

  In S <b> 258, the main CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories for the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holds is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holds is 4 or more, the special symbol related switch check processing routine is terminated. If it is determined that the number of holds is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S259.

  In S259, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of reserves of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S260.

  In S260, the main CPU 71 performs various random value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 71 extracts a hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts a hit symbol determination random value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. The random number value for effect condition determination is extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 73.

  In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). The determination results based on the hit determination random numbers are derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various kinds of games acquired by winning the game ball at the second starting opening 45 during the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Are sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). If this process ends, the process moves to S261.

  In S261, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S262.

  In S262, the main CPU 71 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not to win a prize based on random lottery. If this process ends, the process moves to S263.

  In S <b> 263, the main CPU 71 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 73. The start winning command is as described above. When this process ends, the special symbol related switch check processing routine ends.

[Game information data generation processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing game information data generation processing executed by the main CPU 71. This game information data generation process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in S300, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the security signal output flag is on. When determining that the security signal output flag is on, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S301, and when determining that the security signal output flag is not ON, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S304.

  In S301, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the security signal output flag to OFF. In this process, the main CPU 71 turns off the security signal output flag that is turned on. When this process is finished, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S302.

  In S302, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting a minimum output period in the security signal output timer. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets the minimum output period 60 s, which is the security signal output time, in the security signal output timer. The time set in the security signal output timer can be changed to any time other than 60 s. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S303.

  In S303, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting security signal output data. In this process, the main CPU 71 generates and sets a security signal. When this process is finished, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S306.

  In S304, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the security signal output timer is zero. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the security signal output timer is 0. If the value of the security signal output timer is determined to be 0, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S305, and If it is determined that the value of the output timer is not 0, the process proceeds to S310.

  In S305, the main CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the security signal output data. In this process, the main CPU 71 clears the security signal output data. When this process is finished, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S306.

  In S306, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the sub unauthorized signal output flag is ON. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the sub illegal signal output flag is on. If it is determined that the sub illegal signal output flag is on, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S307 and outputs the sub illegal signal output. If it is determined that the flag is not on, the process proceeds to S310.

  In S307, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the sub illegal signal output flag to OFF. In this process, the main CPU 71 turns off the sub incorrect signal output flag that is turned on. When this process is finished, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S308.

  In S308, the main CPU 71 performs a process of setting the minimum output period in the sub-illegal signal output timer. In this process, the main CPU 71 sets a minimum transmission period 30 s, which is a transmission time of a command indicating an illegal operation, in the sub illegal signal output timer. Note that the time set in the sub fraudulent signal output timer can be changed to any time other than 30 s. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S309.

  In S309, the main CPU 71 performs processing for setting the sub-injustice signal as output data. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of generating a command indicating an illegal operation as a sub illegal signal and setting the command as a transmission command. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the game information data generation process routine.

  In S310, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the sub unauthorized signal output timer is zero. In this process, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the sub illegal signal output timer is 0. If the main CPU 71 determines that the value of the sub incorrect signal output timer is 0, the process proceeds to S311. If it is determined that the value of the sub illegal signal output timer is not 0, the game information data generation processing routine is terminated.

  In S <b> 311, the main CPU 71 performs processing for clearing the sub unauthorized signal output data. In this process, the main CPU 71 clears a transmission command indicating an unauthorized operation as sub unauthorized signal output data. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the game information data generation process routine.

  By such processing, the main CPU 71 sets the security signal output data unless the value of the security signal output timer is 0, and performs an illegal operation as the sub unauthorized signal output data unless the value of the sub unauthorized signal output timer is 0. It is configured to set the send command shown. As a result, the main CPU 71 continuously outputs the security signal to the outside until the value of the security signal output timer becomes 0, and continuously exhibits an illegal operation until the value of the sub-illegal signal output timer becomes 0. A transmission command is transmitted to the sub CPU 81.

[Port output processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing port output processing executed by the main CPU 71. This port output process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in S320, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not security signal output data is set. In this process, if the main CPU 71 determines that the security signal output data is set, it moves the process to S321, and if it determines that the security signal output data is not set, it proceeds to S322. Move.

  In S321, the main CPU 71 performs security signal output processing. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of externally outputting the set security signal output data. When this process is finished, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S322.

  In S322, the main CPU 71 determines whether or not the sub invalid signal output data is set. In this process, when the main CPU 71 determines that the transmission command indicating the illegal operation is set as the sub illegal signal output data, the main CPU 71 shifts the process to S323 and transmits the transmission command indicating the illegal operation as the sub illegal signal output data. When it is determined that is not set, the port output processing routine is terminated.

  In S323, the main CPU 71 performs a sub unauthorized signal output process. In this process, the main CPU 71 performs a process of transmitting a transmission command indicating an illegal operation as the set sub illegal signal. When this process ends, the main CPU 71 ends the port output processing routine.

[Processing by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 81 will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 200 receives various commands from the main control circuit 70 and performs various processes such as an accessory control process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a sub control circuit main process executed by the sub CPU 81. This sub-control circuit main process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in S330, the sub CPU 81 performs a process for initialization in response to power-on. If this process ends, the process moves to S331.

  In S331, the sub CPU 81 performs processing for clearing the watch dog counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S332.

  In S332, the sub CPU 81 performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 70 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 83. If this process ends, the process moves to S333.

  In S333, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect selection process. In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of selecting the type and content of the effect based on the command received from the main control circuit 70. This effect selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S334.

  In S334, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the processing for the received command has been completed. In this process, if it is determined that the process for the received command has been completed, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S335. If it is determined that the processing for the received command has not been completed, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S332.

  In S335, the sub CPU 81 performs a drawing control process. In this processing, the sub CPU 81 transmits a drawing request for drawing display in the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 to the display control circuit 86. The display control circuit 86 including the VDP reads various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and production image data from the image data ROM based on a drawing request from the sub CPU 81, and superimposes them to display the liquid crystal. It is displayed on the display area 13 a of the display device 13. When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S336.

  In S336, the sub CPU 81 performs projector control processing. In this processing, the sub CPU 81 transmits a drawing request for causing the projector apparatus body B2 to emit irradiation light including an image to the projector control circuit 90. Based on the drawing request from the sub CPU 81, the projector control circuit 90 including the DLP control circuit 232 reads various video data from the ROM for projection video and emits irradiation light so as to project the video on the front surface of the game board 12. Let it emit. When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S337.

  In S337, the sub CPU 81 performs a sound control process. In this process, the sub CPU 81 executes a sound control process for controlling sound generated from the speaker 11 via the sound control circuit 87. When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S338.

  In S338, the sub CPU 81 performs lamp control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 81 controls the light emission (lighting / flashing) of the lamp / LED group 18 included in the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C, the reel accessory 67, the movable accessory 68 and the like via the lamp control circuit 88. The lamp control process to be executed is executed. When the process is finished, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S339.

  In S339, the sub CPU 81 performs an accessory control process. In this process, the sub CPU 81 executes an accessory operation control process for controlling the operations of the reel accessory 67 and the movable accessory 68 via the effect operation control circuit 89. When this process is terminated, the sub CPU 81 thereafter repeats the processes of S332 to S339.

  On the other hand, even if the sub CPU 81 is executing the sub control circuit main process, the sub control circuit main process may be interrupted and a timer interrupt process or a command interrupt process to be described later may be executed. Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 36, and the command interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 81. This timer interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in S340, the sub CPU 81 performs processing for saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S341.

  In S341, the sub CPU 81 performs various timer update processes. If this process ends, the process moves to S342.

  In S342, the sub CPU 81 performs a button switch input detection process. In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of detecting the presence / absence of an operation input from the effect button 23 or the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S343.

  In S343, the sub CPU 81 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 81 performs processing for restoring the program saved in S340 to each register. When this process is finished, the timer interrupt process routine is finished.

[Command interrupt processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 81. This command interrupt process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in S350, the sub CPU 81 performs processing for saving a register. In this process, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of saving the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). If this process ends, the process moves to S351.

  In S351, the sub CPU 81 performs processing for storing the received command in the reception buffer. In this processing, the sub CPU 81 performs processing for storing the command transmitted from the main CPU 71 and received in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 83. For example, the sub CPU 81 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 70. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process shown in S332 of FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S352.

  In S352, the sub CPU 81 performs processing for restoring the register. In this processing, the sub CPU 81 performs processing for restoring the program saved in S350 to each register. When this process is finished, the command interrupt process routine is finished.

[Direction selection process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an effect selection process executed by the sub CPU 81. This effect selection process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in S360, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 81 refers to an effect selection table (not shown) based on the command received from the main control circuit 70, and determines the type of effect to be executed based on the specified contents of the effect selection table. If this process ends, the process moves to S361.

  In S361, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect suppression process. This effect suppression processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the effect selection process routine ends.

[Production suppression processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an effect suppression process executed by the sub CPU 81. This effect suppression process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 39, in S370, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lightning projection image is selected as an example of the image projected from the projector device main body B2 based on the effect determined by the previous effect determination process. To do. As shown in FIG. 40 (C) or FIG. 41 (B), the lightning projection image is an image simulating lightning projected on the decoration portion 68A and a part of the display area 13a in conjunction with the operation of the movable accessory 68. It is. When the lightning projection image is selected, the sub CPU 81 shifts the processing to S371. When the lightning projection image is not selected, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression processing routine.

  In S <b> 371, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a premier display effect has been selected as the display effect of the liquid crystal display device 13. The premier display effect means an effect of a liquid crystal image displayed on the display area 12a suggesting a big hit or the like, while the execution frequency is low, but an expectation such as a big hit increases when executed. When the premium display effect is selected, the sub CPU 81 shifts the processing to S372. If the premier display effect is not selected, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S373.

  In step S <b> 372, the sub CPU 81 sets data for stopping the projection of the lightning projection image in a predetermined area of the work RAM 83. Based on this data, the sub CPU 81 controls the projector apparatus main body B2 so as not to project the lightning projection image when executing a premier display effect. When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression process routine.

  In step S <b> 373, the sub CPU 81 sets control data for making the display area 13 a of the liquid crystal display device 13 uniform black suitable for lightning projection video in a predetermined area of the work RAM 83. Based on this data, the sub CPU 81 controls the liquid crystal display device 13 so that the display area 13a is uniformly black when projecting a lightning projection image. In order to make the display area 13a uniform black, a liquid crystal image that is entirely black may be displayed over the entire display area 13a, or the liquid crystal display device 13 is turned off to stop driving, and the display area 13a may be set to black so-called normally black mode. When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S374.

  In S374, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the rendering operation of the movable accessory 68 has been selected. In the effect operation of the movable accessory 68, the decoration portion 68A moves from the standby position to an operation position overlapping the display area 13a. When the production operation of the movable accessory 68 is selected, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S375. When the production operation of the movable accessory 68 is not selected, the sub CPU 81 ends the production suppression processing routine.

  In S375, the sub CPU 81 sets data for lowering the brightness of the LED 681 in the decoration unit 68A to a predetermined area of the work RAM 83. Based on this data, the sub CPU 81 projects the lightning projection image and moves the decoration portion 68A to the operation position overlapping the display area 13a, compared with the normal case where the lightning projection image is not projected. The brightness of the LED 681 is reduced by a predetermined amount. When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression process routine.

[Example of direction operation]
40 to 45 show examples of the rendering operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The rendering operation will be described below with reference to these drawings.

  FIGS. 40A to 40C show the rendering operation using the movable accessory 68, the liquid crystal image, and the projected video. 40A to 40C show a state in which the upper decoration unit 40 is removed. In the state where the upper decoration unit 40 is attached, for example, in the standby state of FIG. The object 68 cannot actually be visually recognized by the upper decoration unit 40. FIG. 40C shows an inappropriate example when projecting a projected video.

  First, as shown in FIG. 40A, when the movable accessory 68 is in the standby position, the liquid crystal image is displayed in the display area 13a without the decorative portion 68A overlapping the display area 13a.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (B), when the movable accessory 68 moves from the standby position to the appearance position, the decoration portion 68A overlaps with a part of the display area 13a. In such a state, the LED 681 of the decoration portion 68A emits light or blinks with a predetermined luminance (these are collectively referred to as “light emission effect”). Accordingly, the player is interested in the light emission effect 681A along with the movement of the decoration portion 68A, and the visual effect is enhanced.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 40 (C), for example, a lightning projection image 500 may be part of the game area 12a around the decoration portion 68A or the like due to irradiation light from a projector device body B2 (not shown). It is projected even to a part of the display area 13a. That is, the main portion 510 of the lightning projection image 500 is formed in the decoration portion 68A, but the remaining part 520 of the lightning projection image 500 is formed in a part of the game area 12a and the lightning projection image 500. The other part 530 is formed in a part of the display area 13a. Such a lightning projection image 500 may appear to overlap a liquid crystal image such as a character (not shown) in the display area 13a.

  At this time, if the light emission effect 681A by the LED 681 has the above-mentioned predetermined luminance, the light of the main part 510 of the lightning projection image 500 formed on the decoration portion 68A and the light of the light emission effect 681A are mixed, thereby causing a lightning projection image. It becomes easy to visually recognize 500 like white and blurred. In addition, the other portion 530 of the lightning projection image 500 overlaps with a liquid crystal image (not shown) in the display area 13a, and accordingly, the color tone of the lightning projection image 500 is easily broken and visually recognized. As a result, the color of the lightning projection image 500 becomes poor, and the lightning projection image 500 becomes unclear. The reason why the lightning projection image 500 becomes unclear is that the lightning projection image 500 is formed by combining light of RGB colors, and the light of the lightning projection image 500 and the light of the light emission effect 681A or the light of the liquid crystal image. This is thought to be because the brightness of a specific color is strengthened by mixing and additive color mixing. In order to prevent such blurring of the image from occurring, in the present embodiment, means described below are taken.

  FIG. 41A shows a state in which the lightning projection image 500 is projected to the periphery around the decoration portion 68A, and FIG. 41B shows the decoration portion 68A and the lightning projection image 500 in the state of FIG. The state which abbreviated is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (A), in the lightning projection image 500, as in FIG. 40 (C), the main part 510 is formed in the decoration part 68A, and the remaining part 520 is part of the game area 12a. The remaining other part 530 is formed in a part of the display area 13a.

  At this time, the LED 681 of the decoration portion 68A is temporarily stopped from emitting light by stopping light emission or blinking. In addition, as shown in FIG. 41B, in the display area 13a, for example, a black or gray scale gray color extends from an area overlapping the lightning projection image 500 to an area where the other portion 530 of the lightning projection image 500 is formed. A liquid crystal image 300 having such display colors is formed. The liquid crystal image 300 having such a display color exhibits a color tone suitable for a projection mapping video.

  That is, in the state shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the lightning projection image 500 is not perceived as white and blurred without being mixed with the light of the lightning projection image 500 and the light of the light emission effect. . In addition, although the other part 530 of the lightning projection image 500 overlaps with the liquid crystal image 300, the color tone of the lightning projection image 500 is not lost because the liquid crystal image 300 itself emits dark light or no light. That is, the light of the lightning projection image 500 and the light of the light emission effect and the light of the liquid crystal image 300 are not mixed or weakly mixed, and thus the brightness of the specific color is not increased. Therefore, even if the lightning projection image 500 is projected on the decorative portion 68A of the movable accessory 68 that overlaps the display area 13a, a clear image can be projected without causing blurring in the entire lightning projection image 500.

  When the lightning projection image 500 is projected onto the decoration portion 68A of the movable accessory 68, the LED 681 of the decoration portion 68A is used as long as the light of the light emission effect 681A does not affect the clarity of the lightning projection image 500. The light may be emitted or blinked at a luminance lower than a predetermined luminance. The display area 13a may display a liquid crystal image 300 in which the entire area is black or gray on a gray scale. Further, the display area 13a may be black in the normally black mode by stopping the driving by turning off the power of the liquid crystal display device 13.

  FIGS. 42A to 42C show a rendering operation using the movable accessory 68, a liquid crystal image, and a projected video. As the liquid crystal image, a shield liquid crystal image 310 imitating a shield and a star pattern 320 showing a glitter are displayed in the display area 13a. As projected images, crack projected images 540 and 550 showing cracks are projected.

  First, as shown in FIG. 42A, when the decorative portion 68A moves from the standby position to the appearance position while the shield liquid crystal image 310 is displayed in the display area 13a, the decorative portion 68A moves to the shield of the display area 13a. The liquid crystal image 310 is partially overlapped. In such a state, the LED 681 of the decoration portion 68A is stopped from emitting light or blinking as described above, or the luminance is reduced. At this time, a crack projection image 540 may be projected onto the decoration portion 68A. Such a crack projection image 540 of the decoration portion 68A appears as an effect suggesting a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 42B, the crack projection image 540 is erased while the decorative portion 68A overlaps a part of the shield liquid crystal image 310. At this time, a star pattern 320 is displayed in a part of the display area 13a that cannot be seen from the front of the player by overlapping with the decoration portion 68A. The star pattern 320 is a liquid crystal image that is invisible to the player located in the front, but can be visually recognized by going around the side of the decorative portion 68A and looking through the gap between the decorative portion 68A and the display area 13a. It is said. Such a star pattern 320 can be visually recognized only by looking into after the appearance of a crack projection image 540 that suggests an unfavorable gaming state, and a gaming state that seems to be disadvantageous for the player is actually an advantageous gaming state. It appears as a so-called reverse production that suggests that.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42C, a crack projection image 550 is projected so as to overlap the shield liquid crystal image 310 in the display region 13a. At this time, in the display region 13a, for example, a region where the crack projection image 550 is projected (a part of the shield liquid crystal image 310) can display a clear image, for example, black or a gray uniform gray scale. It is partially formed as a display color area. The crack projection image 550 formed on the shield liquid crystal image 310 appears as an effect suggesting a game state advantageous to the player. In addition, you may make it project the projection image which imitated the shield instead of the shield liquid crystal image 310 on the display area 13a. Further, if the star pattern 320 and the crack projection image 550 appear, not all are in an advantageous gaming state, but may be a so-called gaze effect as a disadvantageous gaming state even if it appears.

  FIGS. 43A to 43C show an effect operation using the movable accessory 68, the liquid crystal image, and the projected video. As the liquid crystal image, a shield liquid crystal image 310 imitating a shield and a crack pattern 330 showing cracks are displayed in the display area 13a. As the projection image, a spark projection image 560 showing a pattern in which sparks are scattered is projected. 42 (A) to 42 (C) show advantages and disadvantages of the gaming state because the sword (decoration portion 68A of the movable accessory 68) and the shield (shield liquid crystal image 310) collide with each other and cracks occur on either side. It is a production that suggests.

  As shown in FIG. 43A, the decorative portion 68A moves from the standby position to the appearance position as shown in FIG. 43B from the state where the shield liquid crystal image 310 is displayed in the display area 13a. At this time, the decorative portion 68A may reciprocate over and over again. In such a case, the sword and the shield can be expressed appropriately. When the decoration portion 68A overlaps with a part of the shield liquid crystal image 310, a spark projection image 560 is overlapped with the shield liquid crystal image 310 in a part of the display area 13a that is visible from the front of the player near the decoration portion 68A. Is projected. At this time, in the display region 13a, for example, a region where the spark projection image 560 is projected (a part of the shield liquid crystal image 310) can display a clear image, for example, black or a gray-scale uniform gray scale. It is desirable that the display color region is partially formed. The spark projection image 560 formed on the shield liquid crystal image 310 preferably expresses how the sword and the shield collide. Note that in the display area 13a in such a case, instead of the shield liquid crystal image 310, a projection image imitating a shield may be projected.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), in the display area 13a, the movable accessory 68 is stationary with the decorative portion 68A overlapping the shield liquid crystal image 310. At this time, a crack pattern 330 is displayed in a part of the display area 13a that cannot be seen from the front of the player by overlapping with the decoration portion 68A. The crack pattern 330 is a liquid crystal image and is invisible to the player located in the front, but can be visually recognized by going around the side of the decorative portion 68A and looking through the gap between the decorative portion 68A and the display area 13a. It is said. Thereafter, when a predetermined time elapses after the movable accessory 68 stops, the decorative portion 68A returns to the standby position although not particularly shown. As a result, the player can visually recognize the crack pattern 330 directly from the front without being blocked by the decorative portion 68A. Such a crack pattern 330 can be visually recognized only by looking into the movable accessory 68 after it has stopped, and can be directly visible after a predetermined time has passed since the stationary, so that it is advantageous for the player. Appears as a production that suggests.

  44 (A) and 44 (B) show the rendering operation using the reel accessory 67 and the projected video. As the projected image, a protection color projection image 570 that makes blue 7 (671A), red 7 (671B), or blank 671C unrecognizable or difficult to visually recognize as the identification symbol of the reel accessory 67 is projected. Further, as the projected image, a lost projection image 571 is projected. Note that FIG. 44B shows an effect that makes it difficult to discriminate until blue 7 (671A) or blank 671C is finally notified.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the reel accessory 67 performs the variation display or stop display of the identification symbol, and if the projection image is not projected on the opening 12b, the internal LED 677 has a predetermined luminance. The light can be emitted or blinked. On the sheet member 671 of the reel accessory 67, for example, blue 7 (671A), blank 671C, and red 7 (671B) are formed at predetermined intervals against a white plain background. Blue 7 (671A) is a drawing area printed or applied in uniform blue. Red 7 (671B) is a drawing area printed or applied in a uniform red color. The blank 671C is a uniform white or gray background area without a printed or coated area. For example, when the reel unit 670 (see FIGS. 9 and 10) rotates so as to move from top to bottom as viewed from the player side, the identification symbol is red 7 (671B) → blank 671C → blue 7 (671A). → Red 7 (671B) → ... are displayed in the order of variation. In the state where the rotation of the reel unit 670 is stopped, as shown in the right column of FIG. 44A, for example, when implying a hit (big hit, small hit), the position of the opening 12b is blue 7 (671A) or red 7 (671B) is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when suggesting a loss, the blank 671C is stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 44 (B), when the identification symbol is variably displayed by rotating the reel unit 670, blue 7 (671A), blank 671C, and red 7 (671B) are sequentially displayed at the position of the opening 12b. It moves fast and you can see colors that are assimilated according to the speed.

  Then, when suggesting a hit, as shown in the left column of FIG. 44 (B), the rotation of the reel body 670 stops and, for example, blue 7 (671A) is stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b. At this time, from the projector apparatus main body B2 (not shown), a protection color projection image 570 made of blue having the same color or the same color as blue 7 (671A) is projected so as to spread at least over the entire opening 12b. Since the protection color projection image 570 is made of blue having the same color or the same color as that of blue 7 (671A), it is difficult to distinguish blue 7 (671A) in terms of color vision. That is, blue 7 (671A) stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b has melted into the protective color projection image 570. At this point, the player has stopped displaying blue 7 (671A). It is impossible or difficult to visually determine whether the blank 671C is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time elapses after the reel body 670 stops rotating, the projection of the protective color projection image 570 from the projector apparatus main body B2 is stopped, and as a result, the stop-displayed blue 7 is displayed at the position of the opening 12b. (671A) is directly visible.

  On the other hand, when suggesting a loss, as shown in the right column of FIG. 44B, when the rotation of the reel unit 670 stops, a blank 671C is stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b. At this time, from the projector apparatus main body B2 (not shown), a protective color projection image 570 made of blue having the same color or the same color as, for example, blue 7 (671A) is projected so as to spread at least over the entire opening 12b. . Since the protective color projection image 570 is reflected by the blank 671C and appears to be uniform blue, it is difficult to determine visually whether blue 7 (671A) is stopped. That is, even at this time, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to visually determine whether blue 7 (671A) is stopped and displayed, or whether blank 671C is stopped.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time elapses after the reel body 670 stops rotating, the projection of the protective color projection image 570 from the projector apparatus main body B2 is stopped, and the entire opening 12b is replaced with the blank 671C as a background instead. The loss projection image 571 of white 7 shown is projected. In the lost projection image 571, the white portion 7 is formed by the white image 571A, and the surrounding background is formed by the same blue background image 571B as the protection color projection image 570. That is, when suggesting the loss, the projection image 571 is projected at the position of the opening 12b so as to give an impression of the loss more than the blank 671C.

  With the protected color projection image 570 and the loss projection image 571 projected according to the color of the identification symbol, the player can finally visually recognize either the blue 7 (671A) or the blank 671C. Until then, the degree of expectation for the big hit can be maintained, and the production effect is enhanced. When red 7 (671B) is stopped and displayed in the case of suggesting a hit, a protection color projection image 570 composed of red having the same or the same color as red 7 (671B) is projected. . Further, a protection color projection image 570 having a uniform predetermined color tone other than blue and red is projected, and it is made visible that either blue 7 (671A) or red 7 (671B) is stopped. However, blue 7 (671A) and red 7 (671B) may be melted into the protection color projection image 570 so that one of them cannot be distinguished. Of course, identification patterns other than blue and red may be provided, and a protection color projection image 570 having a color tone corresponding to them may be projected.

  FIG. 45 shows an effect operation using the reel accessory 67 and the projected image. As a projection image, in addition to the protection color projection image 570, for example, a blue 7 projection image 572 having the same color and the same design as blue 7 (671A) is projected. FIG. 45 shows an effect in which the reel accessory 67 repeats the display and stop display of the identification symbol for a predetermined number of times (in the example of FIG. 45, four pseudo-reams) as a so-called pseudo-ream.

  As shown in FIG. 45, when the first pseudo-ream is started, the reel accessory 67 starts to display the variation of the identification symbol, and then stops the predetermined identification symbol (in the figure, a blank 671C as an example). When displayed, the first pseudo-ream ends. At this time, a blue 7 projection image 572 simulating blue 7 with the blank 671C as a base is projected on the entire opening 12b. Such a blue 7 projection image 572 impresses the pseudo-ream itself. Thereafter, similarly, the second and third pseudo-operations are repeated.

  Eventually, for example, if an effect that suggests a hit or a loss is performed in the fourth pseudo series, the reel accessory 67 starts to display the variation of the identification symbol by the start of the fourth pseudo series. Thereafter, when the winning is suggested, the rotation of the reel body 670 is stopped, and for example, blue 7 (671A) is stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b. At this time, from the projector apparatus main body B2 (not shown), a protection color projection image 570 made of blue having the same color or the same color as blue 7 (671A) is projected so as to spread at least over the entire opening 12b. As a result, blue 7 (671A) stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b has melted into the protective color projection image 570, and at this point, the player has stopped displaying blue 7 (671A). It is impossible or difficult to visually determine whether the blank 671C is stopped and displayed.

  Although not particularly shown, when suggesting a loss, when the reel body 670 stops rotating, the blank 671C is stopped and displayed at the position of the opening 12b. At this time, from the projector apparatus main body B2 (not shown), a protective color projection image 570 made of blue having the same color or the same color as, for example, blue 7 (671A) is projected so as to spread at least over the entire opening 12b. . Accordingly, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to visually determine whether Blue 7 (671A) is stopped and displayed, or whether Blank 671C is stopped and displayed.

  Then, when a predetermined time elapses after the reel body 670 stops rotating in the case of winning, the projection of the protection color projection image 570 from the projector apparatus main body B2 is stopped, and as a result, a stop display is displayed at the position of the opening 12b. The blue 7 (671A) thus made becomes visible directly. On the other hand, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel body 670 stopped rotating in the case of loss, the projection of the protection color projection image 570 from the projector apparatus main body B2 is stopped, and as a result, the blank 671C can be directly visually recognized. At this time, as shown in FIG. 44 (B) described above, a lost projection image 571 may be projected onto the position of the opening 12b.

  According to such a pseudo-continuous rendering operation, the expectation for the big hit is maintained until either one of the blue 7 (671A) and the blank 671C is finally directly visible in the final round of the pseudo-ream. The production effect is enhanced. When red 7 (671B) is stopped and displayed in the case of suggesting a hit, a protection color projection image 570 composed of red having the same or the same color as red 7 (671B) is projected. . Further, a protection color projection image 570 having a uniform predetermined color tone other than blue and red is projected, and it is made visible that either blue 7 (671A) or red 7 (671B) is stopped. However, blue 7 (671A) and red 7 (671B) may be melted into the protection color projection image 570 so that one of them cannot be distinguished. Of course, identification patterns other than blue and red may be provided, and a protection color projection image 570 having a color tone corresponding to them may be projected. In addition, the effect operation shown in FIG. 45 is not limited to the pseudo-ream, but can be applied as an effect operation of a mini game, for example.

[Modifications and Other Embodiments]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 65, a modified example of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment and a gaming machine according to another embodiment will be described. Note that the same or similar components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

[Modification of game board]
46 and 47 show modified examples of the game board 12. In the game board 12 shown in the figure, in addition to the reel accessory 67, a decorative logo member 69 that three-dimensionally displays a logo type such as a model name is provided above the center of the display area 13a. The opening 12b for displaying the identification symbol of the reel accessory 67 is provided on the upper right side of the display area 13a, and a decorative cover 12c having a three-dimensional design is provided around the opening 12b. It has been. A projector unit (not shown) can project an image on the decorative cover member 12c including the decorative logo member 69 and the opening 12b.

[Example of projection effect operation]
48 (A) to 48 (F) show an example of the effect operation using the reel accessory 67 and the projected image, and FIG. 49 shows an example of the effect operation for projecting the image up to the decorative logo member 69. .

  As shown in FIG. 48 (A), when the reel symbol 670 (not shown in the figure) of the reel accessory 67 rotates and the identification symbol is variably displayed, the position of the opening 12b is blue 7 (671A), Blank 671C and red 7 (671B) move at a high speed in order, and it can be seen that these colors are assimilated according to the speed.

  The color formed by such a high-speed movement of the identification pattern does not clearly indicate the original blue or red, but appears to be different from the blue or red due to the rotation color mixture. As the rotational speed of the reel body 670 increases, the sheet member 671 looks more uniform in the opening 12b due to rotational color mixing. As shown in FIG. 48B, a character projection image 580 showing a character or the like different from the identification symbol is projected onto the sheet member 671 that appears to have a uniform color through the opening 12b. In order to make such a character projection image 580 clear, the color formed by the rotational color mixture is preferably black or gray with a gray scale, but may be a color with other colors.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48C, a character projection image 580 is projected onto the opening 12b, while a background projection showing the background of the character projection image 580 is included on the decorative cover 12c including the entire opening 12b. An image 581 is projected.

  Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 48D, a symbol projection image 582 simulating an identification symbol is projected onto the opening 12b instead of the character projection image 580.

  When the symbol projection image 582 is thus projected onto the opening 12b, the symbol projection image 582 gradually increases as shown in FIGS. 48E and 48F, and is projected so as to expand to a position overlapping the decorative cover 12c. Is done. Note that the projected image may be configured to be projected only on the surrounding decorative member and the like while avoiding the flow-down area of the game ball. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movement of the game sphere from being difficult to visually recognize, and to prevent the player from feeling reluctant because the image is reflected on the game sphere that rolls randomly.

  According to such an effect operation, when the character projection image 580, the background projection image 581, and further the symbol projection image 582 are projected onto the opening 12b during the variation display of the identification symbol by the reel accessory 67, the variation is projected. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the display is in progress or the stop display, and a variety of visual effects can be performed.

  In addition, since the background projection image 581 and the design projection image 582 can be projected so as to extend to the decorative cover 12c larger than the opening 12b, it is possible to perform further various effects.

  As shown in FIG. 49, during the variable display of the identification symbol by the reel accessory 67, the character projection image 580 and the background projection image 581 projected on the positions of the opening 12b and the decoration cover 12c are displayed as the decoration logo member. There is a case where the projection position is moved to the position 69 and projected so as to be enlarged to the size found on the decorative logo member 69.

  According to such a production operation, the character projection image 580 can be made to feel as if it has moved from the position of the opening 12b or the decorative cover 12c to the position of the decorative logo member 69. An effect such as drawing can be realized.

[Example of reach production operation]
FIG. 50 shows an example of a so-called reach effect operation using the display area 13a and the projected video. In the reach effect operation shown in the figure, the same symbol liquid crystal images 345 to 348 are variably displayed so as to sequentially move from top to bottom in a horizontal row in the display region 13a. In addition, the last number of the code | symbol of symbol liquid crystal image 345-348 respond | corresponds to the number which the said symbol liquid crystal image 345-348 shows as an identification symbol.

  First, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), in the display area 13a, for example, the design liquid crystal images 345 and 346 corresponding to the numbers “5” and “6” are displayed in a variable manner so as to move sequentially from top to bottom. Suppose you are. At this time, a symbol projection image 594 corresponding to the number “4” is projected onto the lower peripheral region of the display region 13 a so as to move in advance of the symbol liquid crystal image 345. In addition, a symbol projection image 597 corresponding to the number “7” is projected on the upper peripheral region of the display region 13 a so as to move in the rear order from the symbol liquid crystal image 346. In addition, the last number of the code | symbol of the symbol projection image | video 594,597 respond | corresponds to the number which the said symbol projection image | video 594,597 shows as an identification symbol. The same applies to the symbols of the other symbol projection images below.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50B, in the display area 13a, the numbers of the identification symbols are shifted by one, and the design liquid crystal images 346 and 347 corresponding to the numbers “6” and “7” are displayed. Fluctuation display is performed so as to move in order from top to bottom. At this time, a symbol projection image 595 corresponding to the number “5” is projected on the lower peripheral region of the display region 13 a so as to move in advance of the symbol liquid crystal image 346. In addition, a symbol projection image 598 corresponding to the numeral “8” is projected on the upper peripheral region of the display region 13a so as to move in a later order than the symbol liquid crystal image 347.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 50C, in the display area 13a, the number of the identification symbol is shifted by one, and the design liquid crystal images 347 and 348 corresponding to the numbers “7” and “8” are displayed on the upper side. It is displayed in a variable manner so that it moves in order from the bottom to the bottom. At this time, a symbol projected image 596 corresponding to the numeral “6” is projected onto the lower peripheral region of the display region 13a so as to move in advance of the symbol liquid crystal image 347. On the other hand, in the area around the upper side of the display area 13a, the symbol projected image corresponding to the numeral “9” should be projected according to the order of the identification symbols described above. A symbol projection image 597 corresponding to is projected. When such a projected pattern image 597 different from the normal order is projected, it becomes an irregular effect that increases the degree of expectation of the big hit, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50 (D), the design liquid crystal image 348 corresponding to the number “8” is displayed variably displayed at the bottom of the display area 13a so as to move from top to bottom. The symbol liquid crystal image 347 corresponding to the number “7” is variably displayed on the upper portion of the region 13a as if the previous symbol projection image 597 has moved downward. At this time, a symbol projection image 597 corresponding to the number “7” is projected onto the lower peripheral region of the display region 13 a so as to move in advance of the symbol liquid crystal image 348. On the other hand, the pattern projection image 597 corresponding to the number “7” is projected on the region around the upper side of the display region 13a by continuing the irregular effect.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 50 (E), a design liquid crystal image 347 corresponding to the number “7” is displayed variably at the bottom of the display area 13a, and the previous design is displayed at the top of the display area 13a. The design liquid crystal image 347 corresponding to the number “7” is displayed in a variable manner as if the projected image 597 has moved downward. At this time, a symbol projected image 598 corresponding to the numeral “8” is projected onto the lower peripheral region of the display region 13 a so as to move in advance of the symbol liquid crystal image 347. On the other hand, the pattern projection image 597 corresponding to the number “7” is projected on the region around the upper side of the display region 13a by continuing the irregular effect. That is, in this state, only the symbol projected image 598 shows a different number “8”, and two symbol liquid crystal images 347 and one symbol projected image 597 indicate the same number “7”. It can be felt that the expectation of the big hit is further increased.

  Finally, as shown in FIG. 50F, the symbol liquid crystal image 347 corresponding to the numeral “7” is stopped and displayed at the lower part of the display area 13a, and the numeral “7” is also displayed at the upper part of the display area 13a. The symbol liquid crystal image 347 corresponding to “7” is stopped and displayed. Similarly, a symbol projection image 597 corresponding to the numeral “7” is projected onto the lower peripheral area of the display area 13a, and the symbol corresponding to the numeral “7” is also projected onto the upper peripheral area of the display area 13a. A projected image 597 is projected. That is, in this state, all of the two symbol liquid crystal images 347 and the two symbol projection images 597 are aligned to indicate the same number “7”. As a result, the player can enjoy, for example, the fact that the big hit has been confirmed by the display mode of the identification symbol combining the liquid crystal image and the projected video.

  As shown as an example in FIG. 51, when the reach effect as shown in FIG. 50 is performed on the game board 12 shown in FIG. 47, the numbers “2” and “3” projected outside the display area 13a are supported. The projected image 592, 593 is projected onto the portion of the game area 12a that covers the rolling area of the game ball so that the irradiation light does not impair the visibility due to irregular reflection or the like. The image is projected as a partially lacking image so as not to form.

[Modified examples of movable parts]
52 and 53 show a modification of the movable accessory.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the decorative part 68A of the movable accessory, light shielding for blocking the light of the LED 681 going outward between the vicinity of the end of the base member 680 and the vicinity of the end of the cover member 684 is performed. A wall 689 is provided. Thus, as shown in FIG. 52, the peripheral portion of the cover member 684 is viewed as a non-light emitting region 684b when viewed from the player side, and even if the LED 681 emits light or blinks, the peripheral non-light emitting region 684b. By projecting the projected image only on the screen, a clear projected image can be projected.

  FIG. 54 shows another modification of the movable accessory.

  The cover member 684 shown in FIG. 54 is not provided with the non-transmissive member 685 in the central portion thereof, and the central portion is partially formed of a non-transmissive material as a non-light emitting region 684b '. As a result, when viewed from the player side, the central portion of the cover member 684 is visually recognized as a non-light emitting region 684b ′, and even if the LED 681 is lit or blinking, only the non-light emitting region 684b ′ in the central portion is projected. By projecting, a clear projected image can be projected.

  FIG. 55 shows another modification of the movable accessory. The projector device main body B2 does not need to be fixed, and may be configured such that the irradiation position and the irradiation angle can be changed by a predetermined driving mechanism in accordance with the game situation or the like.

  55 includes a cover member 684 ′ formed in a substantially circular shape, and an arm member 680 ′ that connects a drive unit and a cover member 684 ′ (not shown) and also serves as a base member. Have Such a decoration part 68A 'also moves from the standby position to the appearance position as an effect suggesting the advantage / disadvantage of the gaming state, and is in a state of overlapping a part of the display area 13a.

  At this time, a gray background liquid crystal image 350 of, for example, gray scale is formed in the central region that occupies the lower side of the cover member 684 ′ in the display region 13 a, and the character body part is overlapped with the background liquid crystal image 350. The displayed character body projection image 600 is projected. A character face projection image 610 showing the character's face is projected onto the cover member 684 '. Although not particularly shown, a liquid crystal image related to the character is displayed in the other area of the display area 13a. According to this, the entire character can be expressed by combining the character body projection image 600 projected onto a partial area of the display region 13a and the character face projection image 610 projected onto the cover member 684 ′. Furthermore, various effects can be performed by combining with liquid crystal images. Instead of these, a liquid crystal image showing the character's body part may be displayed in the area where the background liquid crystal image 350 and the character body projection video 600 are displayed.

[Other Embodiments]
56 to 57 show gaming machines according to the second to third embodiments.

  As shown in FIG. 56, in the gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the projector unit B is not provided with a mirror member, and the projection light is emitted directly from the projector device main body B2 toward the front surface of the game board 12. It is configured. Also with the gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those according to the first embodiment described above and modifications thereof.

  As shown in FIG. 57, in the gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, a direct irradiation type projector unit B is adopted as in the second embodiment, and a so-called front liquid crystal device 13 ′ is used instead of the liquid crystal display device. Is adopted. The movable accessory 68 is located between the game board 12 and the front liquid crystal device 13 ′ on the back side of the upper decoration unit 40 and attached to the upper front part of the game board 12.

  The front liquid crystal device 13 ′ includes a pair of edge lights 13 </ b> A, a light guide plate 13 </ b> B, and a front liquid crystal panel 13 </ b> C, and is disposed between the protective glass 28 and the game board 12. The front liquid crystal device 13 ′ irradiates the back surface of the front liquid crystal panel 13C with light from the edge light 13A via the light guide plate 13B, and displays the liquid crystal image on the entire front surface by controlling the liquid crystal driving of the front liquid crystal panel 13C. . In addition, the front liquid crystal device 13 ′ appropriately controls the liquid crystal driving of the front liquid crystal panel 13C, so that the front liquid crystal panel 13C passes from the front liquid crystal panel 13C to the back through the light guide plate 13B or from the light guide plate 13B to the front liquid crystal. Light is transmitted through the panel 13C to the front surface. That is, the irradiation light and the external light from the projector apparatus main body B2 pass through the front liquid crystal panel 13C and the light guide plate 13B to reach the game area 12a and the decoration portion 68A, and the light reflected there reflects the light guide plate 13B and the front liquid crystal panel 13C. Sensed by the player through.

  The decorative portion 68A of the movable accessory 68 is located so as to be hidden by the upper decorative unit 40 in the standby state (non-operating state), and in the appearance state (the state shown in FIG. 57), the front liquid crystal panel 13C of the front liquid crystal device 13 ′. Or the light guide plate 13B. Further, the player can visually recognize the projected image displayed on the decoration portion 68A through the front liquid crystal panel 13C and the light guide plate 13B. The gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment can also obtain the same effects as those according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment described above and modifications thereof.

  The projector unit B may directly irradiate the game area 12a and the decoration 68A through the front liquid crystal panel 13C and the light guide plate 13B without using the protective glass 28. Also in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, a reflection type projector unit B provided with a mirror member B3 may be employed as in the first embodiment.

[Example of rendering operation according to another embodiment]
58 and 59 show an example of the projection effect operation using the front liquid crystal device 13 ′ and the projection image according to the third embodiment of FIG.

  The movable accessory 68 is located entirely on the back side of the upper decorative unit 40 (not shown) so as to be hidden from the player side in the standby state (non-operating state) (see FIG. 58A), and in the appearance state. Then, the decorative portion 68A moves to a position overlapping with a part of the display area 13a on the front side of the front liquid crystal panel 13C (see FIG. 58B). Thereby, the movable accessory 68 performs a predetermined effect operation so as to cover the effect image displayed on the front liquid crystal panel 13C. In the standby state of FIG. 58 (A), the movable accessory 68 cannot actually be visually recognized by the upper decoration unit 40. That is, such a movable accessory 68 also performs the same rendering operation as that according to the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the decorative portion 68A is placed on the back side of the upper decorative unit 40 in the standby position. It is kept in a horizontal position in a hidden state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the decorative portion 68A appears in an inclined position in a state where a part of the decoration portion 68A is located in front of the front liquid crystal panel 13C and overlaps with the game area 12a. To do. The production effect can also be improved by the appearance operation of the movable accessory 68.

  FIGS. 59A and 59B show an effect operation using the movable accessory 68, the liquid crystal image of the front liquid crystal panel 13C, and the projected video. As the projected video, a character projected video 620 showing a predetermined character is projected. As a liquid crystal image, although not particularly illustrated, a black background color image or a gray background color image suitable for the background color is displayed in a part of the front liquid crystal panel 13C overlapping the character projection image 620. Note that FIG. 59A shows an inappropriate example when projecting a projected video.

  As shown in FIG. 59A, when the character projection image 620 is projected in accordance with the front surface of the front liquid crystal panel 13C and the decorative portion 68A of the movable accessory 68, a light emission effect 681A by the LED 681 (not shown) is performed. Then, a part of the character projected image 620 to be formed on the decorative portion 68A is easily disappeared or visually recognized due to the additive color mixture of light described above. As a result, it appears as if the decorative portion 68 </ b> A overlaps the front side of the character projection image 620, and the projection mapping image such as the character projection image 620 is projected on the physically acting movable accessory 68. However, a powerful production cannot be realized.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), when projecting the character projection image 620, it is preferable not to perform the light emission effect by the LED 681 (not shown). Then, as shown in the figure, the character projection image 620 can be formed so as to protrude from the front surface of the front liquid crystal panel 13C to the decorative portion 68A of the movable accessory 68 without partially missing. As a result, the decoration portion 68A can be visually recognized so as to penetrate the character projection image 620, so that a projection mapping image such as the character projection image 620 can be appropriately projected in accordance with the movable object 68 that physically operates. It is possible to realize a powerful virtual reality presentation.

  60 and 61 show an example of a projection effect operation using the movable accessory 68, the front liquid crystal device 13 ', and the projection image according to the third embodiment of FIG. As the projection image, a box projection image 630 showing the closed state of the treasure box, a box projection image 630 ′ showing the opened state, a sword projection image 640 simulating the same sword as the decoration 68A, and a star pattern projection showing a sparkle An image 650 is projected. As the liquid crystal image, light is transmitted through the background liquid crystal image 360 for forming a black or gray background suitable for forming a projection image inside the box projection video 630 ′, or inside the box projection video 630 ′. A transmissive liquid crystal image 370 for forming a portion and a star pattern liquid crystal image 380 showing glitter are displayed. The box projection images 630 and 630 'and the sword projection image 640 may be displayed as liquid crystal images.

  First, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the decoration portion 68A is not shown as a whole in the standby state (non-operating state) on the back side of the front liquid crystal panel 13C so as to be hidden from the player side. It is located on the back side of the upper decoration unit 40. At this time, a box projection image 630 is projected on a partial area near the decoration portion 68A on the front surface of the front liquid crystal panel 13C. A partial area of the front liquid crystal panel 13C on which the box projection image 630 is projected is controlled to form a black or gray background.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 60B, a box projection image 630 ′ is projected instead of the box projection image 630 on a partial area of the front liquid crystal panel 13 </ b> C corresponding to the box projection image 630. At this time, the inner side of the box projection video 630 ′ is blocked by the background liquid crystal image 360 even if the decoration portion 68A moves to the back side of the background liquid crystal image 360 by displaying the background liquid crystal image 360. Part 68A cannot be seen. Such a box projection image 630 ′ appears as an effect suggesting a loss, for example, when nothing is shown as the background liquid crystal image 360 inside the box projection image 630 ′.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60C, the sword projection video 640 may be projected on the inner side of the box projection video 630 'with the background liquid crystal image 360 displayed. In this case, for example, although the degree of expectation (reliability) is not so high, it is an effect that has some degree of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), the interior of the box projection image 630 ′ can visually recognize the decorative portion 68A that has moved to the back side of the transmissive liquid crystal image 370 by displaying the transmissive liquid crystal image 370. In some cases. In such a case, the actual decoration portion 68A will appear to have entered the treasure box, and the expectation of jackpot will be further enhanced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61B, a star pattern projection image 650 is projected on the decoration portion 68A through the transmissive liquid crystal image 370 inside the box projection image 630 ′, or a star is formed on a part of the transmissive liquid crystal image 370. A patterned liquid crystal image 380 may be displayed. In this case, the effect is such that the degree of expectation (reliability) is further increased. Note that the star pattern liquid crystal image 380 displayed in the transmissive liquid crystal image 370 may be projected as a projected image. According to such an effect, it is possible to appropriately display images and images three-dimensionally and two-dimensionally using the liquid crystal image of the front liquid crystal panel 13 </ b> C, the projected image, and the movable accessory 68. High performance can be realized.

[First Modification of Effect Suppression Processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a first modification of the effect suppression process executed by the sub CPU 81. This effect suppression process is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in S400, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a lightning projection image has been selected based on the effect determined by the effect determination process (S360) of FIG. When the lightning projection image is selected, the sub CPU 81 shifts the processing to S401. When the lightning projection image is not selected, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression processing routine.

  In S401, the sub CPU 81 further determines whether or not the movable accessory 68 performs an effect operation based on the effect determined by the effect determination process (S360). When the movable accessory 68 performs the rendering operation, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S402. When the movable accessory 68 does not perform the effect operation, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression process routine.

  In S402, the sub CPU 81 further determines whether or not the movable accessory 68 performs a light emission effect. When the movable accessory 68 performs the light emission effect, the sub CPU 81 shifts the processing to S403. When the movable accessory 68 does not perform the light emission effect, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression processing routine.

  In step S <b> 403, the sub CPU 81 sets data for stopping the projection of the lightning projection image in a predetermined area of the work RAM 83. Based on this data, the sub CPU 81 controls the projector device main body B2 so that when the movable accessory 68 performs the light emission effect, the light emission effect is given priority and the projection effect based on the lightning projection image is not performed. On the other hand, when the light emitting effect is not performed, if the projection effect of the lightning projection image is selected, the projector apparatus body B2 is controlled so that the projection effect is performed. When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression process routine. According to such processing, the projection effect based on the projection image can be executed only when the light emission effect is not performed, and a clear image can be displayed on the decorative body 68A of the movable accessory 68.

  Note that even if a light emission effect is performed, a projection effect based on a lightning projection image or the like may be executed as long as the movable object 68 does not emit light at a time or timing.

[Second modified example of effect suppression processing]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating a second modification of the effect suppression process executed by the sub CPU 81. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a light emission luminance correction table used in this effect suppression process. The light emission luminance correction table is stored in the program ROM 82 of the sub control circuit 200, for example. The effect suppression process of FIG. 63 is executed in units of the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 63, in S400, the sub CPU 81 selects a projection effect for projecting the projected image toward the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C based on the effect determined by the effect determining process (S360) of FIG. Determine whether or not. When this projection effect is selected, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S411. When such a projection effect is not selected, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression process routine.

  In S411, the sub CPU 81 further determines whether or not the decoration members 66A, 66B, and 66C perform the light emission effect based on the effect determined by the effect determination process (S360). When performing the light emission effect, the sub CPU 81 shifts the process to S412. When the decorative members 66A, 66B, and 66C do not perform the light emission effect, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression processing routine.

  In S <b> 412, the sub CPU 81 sets corrected luminance data corresponding to each of the decorative members 66 </ b> A, 66 </ b> B, 66 </ b> C defined in the light emission luminance correction table of FIG. 64 in a predetermined area of the work RAM 83. In the light emission luminance correction table, the decorative members 66A, 66B, and 66C are represented as “A”, “B”, and “C”, respectively. The corrected luminance data of the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C (“A”, “B”, “C”) is “A”, It is stipulated that correction (reduction) is greatly made in the order of “B” and “C”. Based on such corrected luminance data, the sub CPU 81 controls the projector apparatus main body B2 so as to execute the projection effect by the projected image while performing the light emission effect with the corrected luminance for the decoration members 66A, 66B, and 66C. . When this process ends, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect suppression process routine. According to such processing, even when the lighting effects of the decorative members 66A, 66B, and 66C are performed, the brightness of the decorative member is appropriately corrected (reduced) according to the projection angles α, β, and γ. Since the projected image is projected above, a clear image can be projected on average on any of the decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C.

<Fourth embodiment>
FIGS. 65 to 65 are diagrams illustrating a pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the fourth embodiment.

  A pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the fourth embodiment includes a main body frame having a configuration different from that of the base door 3 (see FIG. 3) of the first embodiment, and includes two projector units arranged in the vertical direction. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the fourth embodiment includes the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the gaming machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments as long as there is no contradiction, and can obtain the same operational effects.

  65 is an external perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. A pachinko gaming machine 1A includes a main body (outer frame) 2, a main body frame 400 pivotally supported by the main body 2, a game board 12A attached to the front side of the main body frame 400, and a front surface of the game board 12A. And a glass door 5 attached to the main body frame 400 on the side.

[Main body and glass door]
The main body 2 as an outer frame has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, and the main body frame 400 can be rotated around a main body frame hinge 2b as a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction in the vicinity of one side edge. Pivot. The glass door 5 has the same configuration as the glass door 4 of the first embodiment, and a dish unit 900 described later is provided at the lower part.

[Body frame]
FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame 400. The main body frame 400 includes a mounting frame 410 disposed on the front side, a cover member 430 that is mounted on the back side of the mounting frame 410 and can accommodate gaming machine components, and between the mounting frame 410 and the cover member 430. And a mounting base 420 provided on the head.

[Mounting frame]
FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the mounting frame 410. The mounting frame 410 has a pair of vertical frames 411 and a pair of horizontal frames 412, and forms a substantially rectangular appearance. The mounting frame 410 includes a storage tank 415, and a screen portion b4 on which irradiation light from a projector unit b, which will be described later, is projected, a game board 12A, a launching device 15, and the like are mounted. Further, the mounting frame 410 is provided with a ball detection unit 800 (see FIG. 67), which will be described later, at a position corresponding to the out port 55 (see FIG. 66) of the game board 12A on the back side. In addition, the pair of vertical frames 411 includes fixing portions 411a (see FIG. 67) that can fix the attachment base 420 and the cover member 430 separately on the back side.

  Game board movable stoppers 413 for detachably fixing the game board 12A are attached to the inner side surfaces of the pair of vertical frames 411, respectively. The game board movable stopper 413 is fixed along the vertical frame 411 at an arbitrary position in the vertical direction. The game board movable stopper 413 detachably holds the side edge of the game board 12A. With such a game board movable stopper 413, for example, the lower side of the game board 12A is locked to a locking part such as a groove arranged at the lower part of the mounting frame 410, and the vicinity of both ends of the upper side is movable on the game board. The game board 12 </ b> A can be fixed to the mounting frame 410 by being held by the stopper 413.

  Further, screen stoppers 414 for detachably fixing the screen portion b4 are attached to the inner side surfaces of the pair of vertical frames 411, respectively. The screen stopper 414 is fixed at an arbitrary position in the vertical direction along the vertical frame 411. A cover member 430 is attached to the back surface of the attachment frame 410 so as to cover the game board movable stopper 413 and the screen stopper 414. The game board movable stopper 413 and the screen stopper 414 may be configured to be movable on the vertical frame 411 and may be configured to be fixed at an arbitrary position. Depending on the size and type of the game member or the production device, a jig for fixing the game member such as the game board 12A or the production device such as the screen portion b4 is attached to the vertical frame 411 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. Since the jig type and position can be changed, a variety of layouts of gaming machines are possible.

[Game board]
FIG. 69 is a top view of the game board 12A. The game board 12A has the same configuration as the game board 12 (see FIG. 4) of the first embodiment, and further has the following configuration. The game board 12A includes a game area 12a, and a first large prize opening solenoid 53b and the like provided on the back side (rear side) of the game board 12A and a wiring section such as the first big prize opening solenoid 53b are connected. And a game board relay board 101. Further, the game board 12A is formed of a material having transparency, a screen sheet is pasted on the back side, and also functions as a screen on which projection light emitted from a projector unit b described later is projected.

  The game board relay board 101 is attached to the vertical base 101A that extends to the back side at a substantially right angle to the surface on which the game area 12a of the game board 12A is formed on the back side (back side). Erected at a substantially right angle. The game board relay board 101 is provided with a connector connecting portion 101a to which a connector for electrically connecting to another board is connected.

  Further, the game board relay board 101 is extended from the outside of the cover member 430 to a position where the connection operation to the connector connection portion 101a can be performed through an opening 432e of a cover member 430, which will be described later, and at least the game In a state where the outer portion of the panel relay board 101 is covered with the cover member 430, the connector connection portion 101a is arranged so that the wiring insertion port 101b faces in the direction of the opening 432e of the cover member 430 described later. Yes. The connector connecting portion 101a functions as an example of a game board connector connecting portion, and is connected to a relay board connector connecting portion 100a (see FIG. 75) that is an example of a specific component connector connecting portion of the relay board 100 (see FIG. 75) described later. It is connected by a member (cable).

  FIG. 70 is a top view of a modified example of the game board 12A. In FIG. 70, the part provided with the vertical base 101A of the game board 12A is shown enlarged. The game board relay board 101 of the modified example can be folded so as to be in a state parallel to the game board 12A from a state in which the game board relay board 101 is erected substantially perpendicular to the game board 12A. Specifically, the modified vertical base 101A is rotated by a base member 101Aa erected substantially at a right angle with respect to the game board 12A and a hinge 101B serving as a rotation shaft extending in parallel with the game area 12a of the game board 12A. A rotation member 101Ab that is freely connected to the base member 101Aa and to which the game board relay board 101 is attached. Further, in the modified vertical base 101A, a protrusion 101a is formed on one of the base member 101Aa and the rotation member 101Ab on the joint surface between the base member 101Aa and the rotation member 101Ab, and the protrusion 101a is provided on the other side. A boss hole 101b into which can be inserted is formed. The rotating member 101Ab is erected at a substantially right angle with respect to the game board 12A, and the projection 101a is inserted into the boss hole 101b, so that the game board relay board 101 is erected at a substantially right angle with respect to the game board 12A. Fixed in state. Further, from this state, the rotation member 101Ab is rotated around the hinge 101B, so that the projection 101a is pulled out from the boss hole 101b, and the game board relay board 101 is in a state parallel to the game board 12A. Folded.

[Mounting base]
71 is a perspective view of the mounting base 420, FIG. 72 is a front view of the mounting base 420, and FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the main body frame 400. The attachment base 420 is attached with a projector unit b and a mirror member b3 as game devices capable of executing control related to the game. The mounting base 420 is formed below the gaming device mounting portion 421 to which the projector unit b is mounted, the projection light hole 422 through which the projection light emitted from the projector unit b can pass, and a projection It has a mirror member base 423 that is disposed below the light hole 422 and to which the mirror member b3 is attached, and a board hole 424 through which the game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 70) of the game board 12A is inserted. The mounting base 420 has two configurations including a gaming device mounting portion 421, a projection light hole 422, and a mirror member base 423, and these configurations are arranged in the vertical direction. Such an upper configuration projects the projection light emitted from the projector unit b onto the back surface of the screen portion b4. The lower configuration projects the projection light emitted from the projector unit b onto the back surface of the game board 12A. The board hole 424 is arranged on the back side of the game board relay board 101 in a state where the attachment base 420 is attached to the attachment frame 410 to which the game board 12A is attached, and the game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 70) is provided. It is a hole to be inserted.

  The gaming device attachment portion 421 is a plate-like body that is inclined downward from the back side toward the front side, and is attached to the back side so that the projector unit b emits projection light obliquely downward on the front side. The projection light hole 422 is a hole formed in a range that does not block the projection light irradiated from the projector unit b. The mirror member base 423 is a plate-like body inclined downward from the back side toward the front side. The mirror member base 423 is formed in a range necessary for reflecting the projection light emitted from the projector unit b. Specifically, since the mirror member base 423 is inclined downward from the back side toward the front side, the distance from the projector unit b mounted on the upper side becomes farther from the back side toward the front side. For this reason, the width of the range necessary for reflecting the projection light emitted from the projector unit b is narrower on the back side than on the front side. That is, the range necessary for reflecting the projection light emitted from the projector unit b on the mirror member base 423 is a trapezoidal shape in which the width of the back side is narrower than the width of the front side when viewed from above. . Therefore, as shown in FIG. 72, the mirror member base 423 is formed in a trapezoidal shape in which the width of the side on the back side is narrower than the width of the side on the front side when viewed from above.

  Further, the mirror member b3 attached to the upper surface of the mirror member base 423 is also formed in a trapezoidal shape in which the width of the side on the back side is narrower than the width of the side on the front side in top view. Further, since the mirror member base 423 is inclined downward from the back side toward the front side, as shown in FIG. 72, the mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3 have a width of the upper side in a front view. It is formed in a trapezoidal shape that is narrower than the width of the lower side. The mirror member b3 is attached to the mirror member base 423 by adjusting members 423a provided in the vicinity of the four corners of the trapezoidal shape. The adjustment member 423a includes, for example, a fastening member that fastens the mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3, and an elastic member that is disposed between the mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3, and loosens the fastening member. Thus, the mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3 are separated from each other, and the mirror member base 423 and the mirror member b3 are brought close to each other by fastening the fastening member. By adjusting the mounting angle of the mirror member b3 with respect to the mirror member base 423 by such an adjusting member 423a, the position and angle of the projection light emitted from the projector unit b projected onto the screen part b4 or the game board 12A. Can be adjusted.

  By attaching the projector unit b to such a gaming device mounting portion 421, one end side of the projector cover b1 provided with a projection lens b2a that emits projection light from the projector device body b2 to be described later is attached to a pachinko gaming machine. On the front side of 1A (see FIG. 66), it is possible to dispose the opposite end of one end side on the back side and provide one end side lower than the opposite end side. Become. Projector unit b is covered with cover member 430. Thus, a predetermined space 405 is formed between the cover member 430, the lower part of the projector cover b1, and the cover member 430 at a position where the projection light emitted from the projection lens b2a is not blocked. In addition, a recess 431a of a cover member 430, which will be described later, is disposed, and the main control board 70A can be accommodated in the recess 431a.

  In addition, you may form in the attachment base 420 in the shape which can attach not only the projector unit b but other game devices, such as the liquid crystal display device 13 (refer FIG. 3). That is, the shape of the mounting base 420 can be changed in accordance with the type of gaming device as long as it can be accommodated in a space formed between the mounting frame 410 and the cover member 430.

[Projector unit]
As shown in FIG. 73, the projector unit b includes a projector device body b2 as a projection image generation device capable of generating projection light, a projector cover b1 as a housing case capable of housing the projector device body b2, and a projector device body. a projection lens b2a as an irradiating unit that emits projection light from b2. The projector apparatus main body b2 has the same configuration as the projector apparatus main body B2 (see FIG. 14), is connected to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 14), and the sub control circuit 200 causes the projector control circuit 90 (see FIG. 14). Is controlled, and the projection light by the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 15) is enlarged and emitted by the projection lens b2a, and this irradiation light is reflected by the mirror member b3 and directed toward the back of the game board 12A and the screen part b4. By projecting the irradiation light, an image is displayed as a visual effect. Such a screen part b4 functions as an example of a reflection part capable of reflecting the projection light emitted from the projector unit b. The screen part b4 functions as an example of a screen part that projects a predetermined image by the projection light reflected by the mirror member b3. In addition, at a position corresponding to the space 405 described above, a part of the cover member 430 is formed in a concave shape, and the main substrate 70A can be accommodated in the concave portion.

FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the optical axis of the projection light emitted from the projector unit b. 74, the projection light L1 from the projection lens b2a of the projector unit b provided in the upper part is emitted downward while forming a projection range as indicated by a dotted line. By the upper mirror member b3, the light is reflected obliquely upward on the front surface side and projected onto the back surface side of the screen portion b4. The projection lens b2a of the present embodiment is configured by a lens member, and the upper half side (front side) of the lens member is shielded from light, and is emitted from the lower half side (back side) of the lens member. A projection image is generated with projection light. Therefore, the projection light emitted from the projection lens b2a is formed so as to spread from the lower half side of the lens member. Similarly, the projection light L2 from the projection lens b2a of the projector unit b provided in the lower part is emitted downward while forming a projection range as indicated by a dotted line, and is projected to the front side by the lower mirror member b3. Reflected obliquely upward and projected onto the back side of the game board 12A.
As described above, the projector unit b or the mirror member b3 is arranged at a fixed installation angle, and the projector unit b, the base case, etc. are accommodated in the space generated behind them while arranging a plurality of gaming devices. Other gaming machine components can be arranged efficiently and space saving can be realized.

[Cover member]
75 is a perspective view of the cover member 430 viewed from the back side, and FIG. 76 is a perspective view of the cover member 430 viewed from the front side. As shown in FIG. 75, the cover member 430 is formed of a back surface portion 431 and two side surfaces 432 facing each other, and a gaming machine configuration is formed in a space formed between the mounting base 420 (see FIG. 73). At least a part of the part can be accommodated. Moreover, the cover member 430 is provided on the back side of the game board by being provided on the most back side, and functions as an example of a cover member that covers electrical components.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the width of the back surface portion 431 is formed to be narrower than the width of the mounting base 420. The back surface portion 431 includes a concave portion 431a that can accommodate the main control board 70A, a lid portion 431b that covers the concave portion 431a, and an opening portion 431c that is formed at a position corresponding to the waste heat outlet of the projector unit b (see FIG. 73). A payout control board accommodating portion 431d capable of accommodating the payout control board 123A. As shown in FIG. 76, the back surface portion 431 is formed with a second guide rod opening 432f in which a receiving portion 434a (see FIG. 80) of the second guide rod 434 described later is disposed. As shown in FIG. 73, the concave portion 431a and the payout control board accommodating portion 431d are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member 430 to the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and cover the main control board 70A and the payout control board 123A. It can be accommodated so as not to protrude from the surface of 430 to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The recess 431a is disposed in a predetermined space 405 formed in the lower part of the projector cover b1 in a state where the cover member 430 is attached to the back side of the attachment base 420 (see FIG. 73), and accommodates the main control board 70A. And covered with a lid 431b. The main control board 70A includes, for example, a main control board connector connection part 70Aa which is an example of a general component connector connection part connected to the relay board 100 (see FIG. 75) by a wiring member (cable). The main control board connector connection portion 70Aa is provided in the vicinity of the side edge of the main control board 70A. Even when the lid portion 431b is attached to the recess 431a, the main control board connector connection portion 70Aa is not covered by the lid portion 431b and exposed. ) Is detachable. Thereby, the surface of the back surface part 431 becomes a substantially flush state. As described above, the cover member 430 can accommodate the main control board 70 </ b> A, which is an example of the first gaming machine component, in the space formed by the back surface portion 431 and the at least two side surface portions 432. The opening 431c is formed at a position corresponding to the waste heat opening of the two projector units b. The payout control board accommodating portion 431 d is disposed in a space formed in the lower portion of the lower mirror member base 423 in a state of being attached to the back side of the attachment base 420. Further, the concave portion 431a is disposed closer to the center of the cover member 430 than the position where a later-described ball passage unit 730 (see FIG. 82) is disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the widths of the side surfaces 432 facing each other become narrower from the front side to the back side. The side surface 432 includes a mounting portion 433 that can be attached to the mounting base 420 on the end side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion 431, and at least one side surface 432 is adjacent to the back surface portion 431 from the end where the mounting portion 433 is provided. It is formed so as to be inclined to the end portion. The inclined side surface 432 includes a side first recess 432a that is a specific housing portion, a side first lid portion 432b that covers the side first recess 432a, a side second recess 432c that is a general housing portion, and a side second recess. It has the side surface 2nd cover part 432d which covers 432c, and the opening part 432e formed in the side surface 1st recessed part 432a. Moreover, the recessed part 431a and the side surface 2nd recessed part 432c are examples of the general accommodating part comprised from an at least 2 or more accommodating part, and are adjacent to the side surface 1st recessed part 432a which is an example of a specific accommodating part.

  The side first recessed portion 432a is provided on the outer surface of the cover member 430, and is formed at a position adjacent to the recessed portion 431a of the back surface portion 431 and the payout control board accommodating portion 431d, and is a specific gaming machine component or second gaming mechanism. The relay board 100 as a component can be accommodated. The second side concave portion 432c is provided on the outer surface of the cover member 430, is formed at a position adjacent to the first side concave portion 432a, and can accommodate the sub control board 80A as a plurality of other types of gaming machine components. . The first side recesses 432a and the second side recesses 432c are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member 430 to the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and the relay board 100 and the sub-control board 80A are connected to the pachinko game from the surface of the cover member 430. It can be accommodated so as not to protrude to the rear side of the machine 1A. The relay board 100 is, for example, a relay board connector that is an example of a specific component connector connection portion that is connected to the main control board 70A, the sub control board 80A, the game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 69), and the like by a wiring member (cable). A connection unit 100a is provided. The sub control board 80A includes, for example, a sub control board connector connecting portion 80Aa that is an example of a general component connector connecting portion connected to the relay board 100 or the like by a wiring member (cable). That is, the relay board connector connection part 100a is connected to the main control board connector connection part 70Aa and the sub control board connector connection part 80Aa by the wiring member (cable). The opening 432e is provided on the outside of the cover member 430 with wiring from the game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 69) of the game board 12A housed in the space formed by the back surface part 431 and the two side parts 432. It is provided so as to be connectable to the relay board 100, and is formed at a position corresponding to the game board relay board 101 erected from the back side of the game board 12A in a state where the cover member 430 is attached to the attachment frame 410. ing. The side first recess 432a in which such an opening 432e is formed is provided on the outer side surface of the side surface, and is a specific storage portion that can store a specific gaming machine component connected to the wiring through the opening. It serves as an example. Further, the second side recess 432c is formed on the inclined side surface portion outside the cover member so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member to the inside of the gaming machine, and is different from the first gaming machine component. It is an example of the accommodating part which can accommodate a gaming machine component. Thus, the main board accommodated in the recess 431a adjacent to the game board relay board 101 and, for example, the side first recess 432a through the connector connected to the connector connection part 101a of the game board relay board 101 from the opening 432e. It becomes possible to electrically connect the control board 70A. As described above, the first side concave portion 432a that can accommodate the relay substrate 100 is disposed at the center of the concave portion that can accommodate other substrates.

  FIG. 77 is a view for explaining the positional relationship between the game board relay board 101, the board hole 424 of the mounting base 420, and the opening 432e of the cover member 430. 77 is an enlarged perspective view of a portion to which the game board relay board 101 is attached. FIG. 77 (a) shows a state in which the attachment base 420 is attached to the back side of the attachment frame 410, and FIG. The state where the cover member 430 is attached to the back side of the base 420 is shown. As shown in FIG. 77 (a), when the attachment base 420 is attached to the attachment frame 410 to which the game board 12A (see FIG. 67) is attached, the connector connecting portion 101a of the game board relay board 101 is attached to the attachment base. 420 protrudes from the substrate hole 424 to the back side. As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the side surface of the game board relay board 101 is attached to the cover member 430 by attaching the cover member 430 to the back side of the attachment base 420 from the state shown in FIG. 77 (a). Covered. In this state, the wiring insertion port 101b of the connector connecting portion 101a faces the direction of the opening 432e of the cover member 430. In FIG. 77, the entire game board relay board 101 is covered by the cover member 430 and the side surface second lid portion 432d, but only a part of the game board relay board 101 may be covered. Further, only one surface such as the outer surface or inner surface of the game board relay board 101 may be covered. In any case, the effect of the present invention can be achieved if at least part of the external force applied to the game board relay board 101 can be prevented. In this case, it is desirable to provide the connector connecting portion 101a in a portion not covered with the cover member 430 (for example, if the outer surface of the game board relay board 101 is covered with the cover member 430, the game board relay board 101 Etc., and a connector connecting portion 101a is provided on the inner surface of the head.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the mounting base 420 is screwed to the fixing portion 411a on the back surface of the mounting frame 410 by a fixing member 425 made of screws or the like. After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the cover member 430 is disposed on the back side of the mounting base 420, covers the fixing member 425 with the mounting portion 433, and is configured with screws or the like that penetrate the mounting base 420. The member 435 is screwed to the fixing portion 411a on the back surface of the mounting frame 410. Therefore, the screws on the mounting base 420 can be removed only after the screws on the cover member 430 are removed.

  FIG. 78 is a top view of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. FIG. 78 shows a state in which the main body frame 400 is opened from the main body 2 (a state in which the main body frame 400 is disposed inside the main body 2 and rotated 90 degrees about the main body frame hinge 2b). The cover member 430 has a side surface 432 opposite to the side pivotally supported by the main body frame hinge 2b and formed inside the virtual circle VC passing through the inner side edge of the main body 2 with the main body frame hinge 2b serving as the rotation axis as the center. And at least part of the shape is formed along a virtual circle.

[樋 connection part]
79 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame 400, and FIGS. 80 and 81 are exploded perspective views of the first guide rod 416 and the second guide rod 434. 80 and 81 are diagrams showing only the first guide rod 416 and the second guide rod 434 shown in FIG. 80 is a view as seen from the attachment frame 410, and FIG. 81 is a view as seen from the cover member 430. As shown in FIG. 79, the mounting frame 410 includes a storage tank 415 that can store game balls supplied from a storage unit (not shown), and a first guide rod 416 that guides game balls downstream from the storage tank 415. Have. The cover member 430 includes a payout device 700 capable of paying out game balls, and a second guide rod 434 that guides the game balls to the payout device 700.

  When the cover member 430 is attached to the mounting frame 410, the first guide rod 416 and the second guide rod 434 are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening, thereby allowing the game ball to flow down. It becomes a state. One of the first guide rod 416 and the second guide rod 434 (the second guide rod 434 in the example shown in FIGS. 80 and 81) is on the other (the first guide rod 416 in the examples shown in FIGS. 80 and 81). The receiving portion 434a formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the opening portion) is provided. The receiving part 434a has a rib 434b as connection position guiding means for guiding the opening inserted into the receiving part 434a to the connection position. The ribs 434b are plate-like bodies that extend in a radial direction centering on the opening and have side edges that are inclined downward from the outer edge to the inner edge of the receiving portion 434a. . The other of the first guide rod 416 and the second guide rod 434 (the first guide rod 416 in the examples shown in FIGS. 80 and 81) is provided on the outer edge of the opening and is shaped as a portion surrounded by the rib 434b. And an engaging portion 416a as an engaging means that engages with the rib 434b at the connection position.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the attachment frame 410 has a third guide rod 418 that guides the game ball to the payout port 901 (see FIG. 65) of the tray unit 900. Further, the cover member 430 has a fourth guide rod (see FIG. 83) as a fourth guide rod for guiding a game ball downstream from a payout device 700 described later.

  The third guide rod 418, the first guide passage 730C, and the second guide passage 730D (see FIG. 84) are configured such that when the cover member 430 is attached to the mounting frame 410, the other opening is inserted into one opening. The game ball can flow down by being connected to. A receiving portion 418a is provided on one of the third guide rod 418 and the first guide passage 730C and the second guide passage 730D (the third guide rod 418 in the example shown in FIG. 67). The receiving part 418a has a plurality of ribs similarly to the receiving part 434a. The discharge port 730B (see FIG. 83) of the first guide path 730C and the second guide path 730D has an engaging portion that engages with the plurality of ribs of the receiving portion 418a, like the first guide rod 416.

[Dispensing device]
82 is an overall perspective view showing the payout device 700, and FIG. 83 is a perspective view showing a ball passage unit 730 included in the payout device 700. The payout device 700 includes a ball supply path 710, a ball delivery mechanism 720, and a ball path unit 730. The ball supply path 710 is a piping component that guides a game ball from a storage tank 415 (see FIG. 79) provided in the upper part to the ball delivery mechanism 720. The ball delivery mechanism 720 feeds out game balls for the number of prize balls while counting the number of prize balls according to the winning prize. The ball passage unit 730 is disposed at the end on the back side of the cover member 430 (see FIG. 79), and guides a game ball drawn out from the ball delivery mechanism 720 to a payout outlet 901 of the dish unit 900 described later. is there.

  The ball supply path 710 transfers game balls from the storage tank 415 (see FIG. 79) to the ball delivery mechanism 720 through the first guide rod 416 and the second guide rod 434 (see FIG. 81) connected to each other. It is provided vertically so that it can flow down naturally one by one. A lower end outlet (not shown) of the ball supply path 710 is connected to an upper inlet (not shown) of the ball delivery mechanism 720.

  The ball delivery mechanism 720 is configured so that the game balls flowing down from the ball supply path 710 can be fed one by one from the lower outlet (not shown) while being guided from the upper inlet (not shown) to the inside. The ball delivery mechanism 720 includes an internal mechanism capable of delivering game balls one by one, a solenoid for operating the same, and a count sensor (not shown) for counting the delivered game balls. When there is no winning, the ball delivery mechanism 720 deactivates the internal mechanism and the solenoid so as not to play out the game ball. On the other hand, if there is a win, the ball delivery mechanism 720 is operated internally until the number of game balls corresponding to the winning is paid out. The game balls are counted by the count sensor while the mechanism and the solenoid are in the activated state, and when the number of game balls is paid out, the internal mechanism and the solenoid are again deactivated. Thereby, the ball delivery mechanism 720 can pay out game balls for the number of prize balls one by one at the time of winning. The lower outlet of the ball delivery mechanism 720 is connected to an introduction port 730A provided at the upper part of the ball passage unit 730, and game balls fed out from the ball delivery mechanism 720 one by one to the introduction port 730A of the ball passage unit 730. Flow down. The game ball drawn out from the ball delivery mechanism 720 is basically guided to the introduction port 730A, but may be guided to a later-described ball extraction port 730a adjacent to the introduction port 730A.

  The ball path unit 730 has a guide path through which a large number of game balls drawn out from the ball delivery mechanism 720 can be arranged in a rosary shape, and passes through the guide path to a payout outlet 901 of the dish unit 900 described later. It is comprised so that a game ball may be guided. 84 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball passage unit 730, and FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball passage unit 730 in a direction different from FIG. The ball passage unit 730 includes a passage partition member 731, a full tank detection lever 732, a full tank detection sensor 733, a first cover member 734, a second cover member 735, and a ball removal member 736. As a guide path for the ball path unit 730, a first guide path 730C is formed between the left side portion of the path partition member 731 and the first cover member 734 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1A. A second guide path 730 </ b> D is formed between the right side portion of the passage partition member 731 and the second cover member 735 when viewed from the front side. Each of the first guide path 730C and the second guide path 730D has a sufficient path length capable of arranging a large number of game balls.

  On the left side of the passage partition member 731, the road side wall of the first guide path 730 </ b> C is formed to extend from the upper inlet 730 </ b> A to the lower outlet 730 </ b> B while meandering back and forth. The road side wall formed on the left side of the passage partition member 731 forms the right half of the first guide passage 730C in a groove shape (see FIG. 85). On the right side of the passage partition member 731, the road side wall of the second guide path 730 </ b> D is formed so as to extend from the upper inlet 730 </ b> A to the lower outlet 730 </ b> B. The road side wall formed on the right side of the passage partition member 731 forms the left half of the second guide passage 730D in a groove shape (see FIG. 84). Such a second guiding path 730D is adjacent to the first guiding path 730C with a partition wall interposed therebetween. That is, the first guide path 730C and the second guide path 730D are arranged side by side so as to guide the game balls in the same direction alongside each other.

  On the other hand, it is also formed on the facing surface of the first cover member 734 facing the left side of the passage partition member 731 so that the road side wall of the first guide path 730C extends from the introduction port 730A to the discharge port 730B while meandering back and forth. Has been. The left side portion of the passage partition member 731 and the road side walls on the opposing surface of the first cover member 734 are combined to form a first guide passage 730C, and an introduction port 730A and a discharge port 730B. In addition, a road side wall of the second guide path 730D is also formed on the facing surface of the second cover member 735 facing the right side portion of the passage partition member 731 so as to extend to the discharge port 730B. A second guide path 730 </ b> D is formed by combining the right side portion of the passage partition member 731 and the road side walls on the opposing surface of the second cover member 735. The first guiding path 730C is formed with a relatively large first width in the lateral direction, while the second guiding path 730D is smaller in the lateral direction than the lateral width (first width) of the first guiding path 730C. It is formed with a second width and is joined to the first guide path 730C on the upstream side of the discharge port 730B. In addition, the discharge port 730B is formed in the lateral direction with the same first width as the lateral width (first width) of the first guide path 730C. Note that the introduction port 730A is electrically connected only to the first guide path 730C, and the game ball drawn out from the ball delivery mechanism 720 basically enters the introduction port 730A. However, at a portion adjacent to the introduction port 730 </ b> A, the right side portion of the passage partition member 731 and the second cover member 735 are combined to form a ball removal port 730 a that leads to the ball removal member 736. Thereby, the game balls that are blocked by the first guide path 730C and cannot enter the introduction port 730A are guided to the ball outlet 730a. The lower end of the second guiding path 730D is formed so as to merge with the first guiding path 730C in the vicinity of the discharge port 730B. Thereby, when the clogging of the game balls in the vicinity of the discharge port 730B is eliminated, the game balls stored in the first guide path 730C and the second guide path 730D are collectively discharged from the discharge port 730B all at once.

  86 is a plan view showing the first guide path 730C of the ball path unit 730, and FIG. 87 is a plan view showing the second guide path 730D of the ball path unit 730. A through-hole 731 </ b> A for guiding a game ball from the right side portion to the left side portion is formed in the upper portion of the passage partition member 731. A branch path 730E capable of guiding a game ball to the through-hole 731A is formed in the upper part of the first guide path 730C in the right side portion of the passage partition member 731. The opposite side of the through hole 731A communicates with the upper end portion of the second guiding path 730D. As a result, when the game ball of the first guide path 730C is clogged up to the upper part and does not flow downward, the game ball flowing down from the introduction port 730A to the upper part of the first guide path 730C is the first guide path 730C. The game ball guided to the branch path 730E by detouring to the branch path 730E is guided to the upper end portion of the second guide path 730D through the through-hole 731A, and the first guide path 730C. Not only the second guiding path 730D but also the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are temporarily stored in the ball passage unit 730 until the game balls are full.

  Further, at the right side portion of the passage partition member 731, the full tank detection lever 732 that can swing in a posture in which the front end portion protrudes in the middle of the second guide path 730 </ b> D, and the front end portion of the full tank detection lever 732 protrude. A full tank detection sensor 733 for detecting a state displaced from the posture to the back is provided. The full tank detection lever 732 is provided in a substantially vertical part of the second guide path 730D. When the full tank detection lever 732 is pressed against a game ball that is clogged up to this part and cannot flow down, the full detection lever 732 is displaced to the back. When the full tank detection lever 732 displaced in the back is in contact for a predetermined time, the full tank detection sensor 733 detects that the second guiding path 730D is full of game balls and is filled accordingly. The signal is output to the payout / firing control circuit 123 (see FIG. 14). Thereby, even if the flow of the game ball in the first guide path 730C stagnates, the game ball feeding operation of the ball delivery mechanism 720 can be continued until the second guide path 730D becomes full.

  Further, a ball removing member 736 is attached to the right side portion of the second cover member 735 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The ball removal member 736 discharges the game ball guided from the ball removal port 730a from the lower end port 736A. The game ball discharged from the lower end port 736A of the ball punching member 736 is guided to a ball punching conduit outside the figure, and finally discharged to a dollar box placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1A.

[Sphere detection unit]
FIG. 88 is a perspective view showing the out port 55 of the game board 12A, and FIG. 89 is a perspective view showing the ball detection unit 800 located behind the out port 55 in a state where the game board 12A is removed. As shown in FIG. 88, an out port 55 is provided in the lower center portion of the game area 12a of the game board 12A to guide the game ball flowing down without winning a prize. As shown in FIG. 89, a plurality of game balls guided from the out port 55 are received behind the out port 55, and the game balls are collected at a location facing the out port 55 and further back to the back. An out-ball receiving member 801 having an opening 801A for guiding the sphere is provided. The ball detection unit 800 is provided in the mounting frame 410 immediately after the opening 801A of the out ball receiving member 801.

  90 is a perspective view showing the entire sphere detection unit 800, FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view showing the sphere detection unit 800, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view showing the sphere detection unit 800 in a direction different from FIG. is there. The sphere detection unit 800 includes a left side component member 810, a right side component member 820, a protruding piece member 830, a first detection sensor 840, and a second detection sensor 850. The ball detection unit 800 is for detecting a game ball discharged through the out port 55 as an inflow port as an out ball. The left component member 810 is provided with a first detection sensor 840, and the right component member 820 is provided with a second detection sensor 850, and these first detection sensor 840 and second detection sensor 850 are integrated. The left side component member 810 and the right side component member 820 are joined together with the protruding piece member 830 sandwiched in the center. The first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 function as an example of an inflow port through which a plurality of game balls can flow in, and a plurality of detection units that can detect the inflowing game balls downstream from the inflow port.

  93 is an internal side view of the left side component 810 constituting the sphere detection unit 800, FIG. 94 is an internal side view of the right side component 820 constituting the sphere detection unit 800, and FIG. It is a top view of the protruding piece member 830 to perform. The left side component member 810 and the right side component member 820 are formed substantially symmetrically. The front opening portions 810A and 820A, the introduction space portions 810B and 820B, the sensor arrangement portions 810C and 820C, and the idle space portions 810D and 820D are respectively provided. Have.

  The front openings 810A and 820A are integrated with each other and are positioned immediately behind the opening 801A of the out ball receiving member 801 to form a receiving port (inlet) that receives the game ball that has passed through the opening 801A. Each of the front openings 810A and 820A has an opening area through which one game ball can pass with a margin. As a result, at least two game balls can enter the integrated reception port at the same time.

  The introduction space portions 810B and 820B are basically paths that guide the game balls from the front opening portions 810A and 820A to the sensor placement portions 810C and 820C, respectively, and each of the game balls can pass with a margin. The bottom surfaces 810Ba and 820Ba of the introduction spaces 810B and 820B are slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, and are formed so as to descend toward the back side.

  Sensor placement units 810C and 820C are places where the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are placed, respectively. The sensor arrangement portions 810C and 820C are arranged such that the front ends of the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are slightly lower than the bottom surfaces 810Ba and 820Ba of the introduction space portions 810B and 820B. The first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are arranged in an inclined posture so as to be higher in order from the front end to the rear end. The first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are provided with a passage hole through which one game ball can pass, and when the game ball passes through the passage hole, it is detected as an out ball and discharged downward. Collected after. Thereby, the game balls guided from the introduction space portions 810B and 820B to the sensor placement portions 810C and 820C are easily guided to the passage holes of the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850.

  The idle space portions 810D and 820D are provided downstream from the out port 55 and above the sensor placement portions 810C and 820C, and form a narrower space than the sensor placement portions 810C and 820C. The play space portions 810D and 820D are wide enough to allow one game ball to sufficiently move in a state of being integrated with each other. The bottom surfaces 810Da and 820Da of the free space portions 810D and 820D are slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane, and are formed so as to rise (raise) toward the back side. The front ends of the bottom surfaces 810Da and 820Da are formed to be positioned higher than the rear ends of the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850. As a result, one game ball may be guided to the inner space 810D and 820D beyond the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850, and is guided to the space 810D and 820D. Even in a game ball, it is easy to fall to the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850. Note that the play space portions 810D and 820D may be a portion having a size enough to allow two or more game balls to play in a state of being integrated with each other.

  The protruding piece member 830 is provided so as to separate the introduction space portions 810B and 820B and the floating space portions 810D and 820D in addition to the sensor arrangement portions 810C and 820C (first detection sensor 840 and second detection sensor 850). 93 and 94, the projecting piece member 830 extends from the bottom of the front openings 810A and 820A serving as inflow ports to the back so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride on. And has an inclined upper end 830A that rises (raises) from the bottom of the front openings 810A and 820A to the free space 810D and 820D. The upper end 830A protrudes slightly above the bottom surfaces 810Ba, 820Ba, 810Da, and 820Da without completely partitioning the introduction spaces 810B and 820B and the floating spaces 810D and 820D. In addition, as shown in FIG. 95, the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830 is formed so as to wave to the left and right along the game ball approach direction, and has a ridge shape so that it is easy to slip even if the inflowing game ball rides up. Is formed. Thereby, the game balls of the sensor placement portions 810C and 820C are likely to fall to either the first detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850 beyond the upper end 830A of the protruding piece member 830 in the left-right direction. In addition, the game balls that have advanced from the sensor placement portions 810C and 820C to the deeper play space portions 810D and 820D are in unstable contact with the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830, and the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection The sensor 850 is shaken off.

[Dish unit]
96 is an overall perspective view showing the glass door 5 provided with the dish unit 900, and FIG. 97 is an overall front view showing the front of the glass door 5. A dish unit 900 is provided on the lower left side of the front of the glass door 5. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there is only one dish unit 900. However, for example, an upper dish unit and a lower dish unit may be provided, and one of them may be applied as the dish unit 900 of this embodiment. . The tray unit 900 stores game balls to be paid out in accordance with winnings, sequentially guides the stored game balls to the launching device 15 and arranges them in a so-called dollar box (illustrated) in accordance with the player's ball removal operation. The game ball can be discharged to (Omitted). A payout outlet 901 for paying out game balls is provided behind the dish unit 900, and a plurality of game balls are paid out from the payout outlet 901 to the dish unit 900. Behind the payout opening 901, a ball delivery receiving member 902 for receiving a game ball from the launching device 15 and sending it out to the payout opening 901 is provided (see FIG. 98).

  98 is an enlarged perspective view showing the whole dish unit 900, FIG. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit 900, FIG. 100 is a top view of the dish unit 900, and FIG. 101 is a saucer cover member 930 of the dish unit 900. It is a top view of the state which removed. The dish unit 900 includes a decorative cover 910, a main body 920, a tray cover member 930, a ball passage member 940, a lid opening / closing part 950, and the like. The decorative cover 910 is attached to the front surface and the side surface of the dish unit 900 so as to cover the ball extraction passage member 940 and the like disposed at the lower portion of the main body 920. As shown in FIG. 99, the main body 920 includes an alignment unit 920A for aligning a plurality of game balls in a row in order to the launching device 15 inside the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and an operation of the lid opening / closing unit 950 by the player. A first opening / closing lid 920B and a second opening / closing lid 953B are provided for guiding the game ball to the ball removal passage member 940. The saucer cover member 930 is disposed on the upper portion of the main body 920, receives and stores the game balls paid out from the payout port 901 first, and stores the stored game balls into the lower alignment portion 920A. It is a guide. The saucer cover member 930 includes an outer peripheral portion that forms a peripheral wall with a space through which a game ball can pass between a cover portion 930A that covers the alignment portion 920A of the main body portion 920 from above and an outer wall 930Aa of the cover portion 930A. 930B, a rectifying portion 930C formed between the outer wall 930Aa and the outer peripheral portion 930B, for guiding the game balls to the lower alignment portion 920A, and a plurality of game balls paid out from the payout port 901 On the bottom surface of the storage unit 930E, the storage unit 930E capable of storing a plurality of game balls sliding down from the slope unit 930D and storing the plurality of game balls into the rectification unit 930C A first opening 930F provided above the opening / closing lid 920B is provided. In FIG. 98, the payout port 901 is not shown. In FIG. 99, illustration of the decorative cover 910 is omitted.

  The alignment portion 920A of the main body portion 920 is provided so as to extend straight to the right and left at a position on the right side opposite to the side where the payout port 901 (ball delivery receiving member 902) is arranged on the rear end side of the dish unit 900. The alignment portion 920A is formed in a linear groove shape by the guide piece 920Aa while being inclined downward from the right side to the left side so that a plurality of game balls flow in a line. That is, the upstream side in the direction in which the game balls are aligned in the alignment portion 920A (the upstream side in the alignment direction) corresponds to the right end portion of the alignment portion 920A that is separated from the payout port 901, and the cover portion 930A is disposed on the right end portion of the alignment portion 920A. A game ball flows down from the rectifying unit 930C. An introduction port 920Ab for guiding a game ball to the internal launching device 15 is provided at the left end of the alignment unit 920A on the downstream side of the alignment, and is located on the bottom surface of the alignment unit 920A and above the second opening / closing lid 953B. A second opening 930G is provided. The game balls arranged in the alignment portion 920A are guided linearly one by one to the introduction port 920Ab. Such an alignment portion 920A is partially covered with the cover portion 930A of the tray cover member 930 while the right end portion is partially exposed. Further, the portion of the main body 920 where the tray cover member 930 is disposed is formed in a shape that is generally aligned with the outer peripheral portion 930B, the rectifying portion 930C, the slope portion 930D, the storage portion 930E, and the first opening portion 930F of the tray cover member 930. Has been. In addition, a wall portion 920Ac is provided on the rectifying portion 930C side of the alignment portion 920A so that even if the cover portion 930A is not attached, the game balls flowing down to the game balls aligned with the alignment portion 920A do not get on. It has been. When the first lid opening / closing portion 920B of the main body 920 is opened by the player's operation of the first lid opening / closing portion 950A, the game balls in the storage portion 930E of the tray cover member 930 move downward through the first opening 930F. Discharged. The discharged game ball is guided to the drop opening 940A located immediately above the dollar box through the ball removal passage member 940, and the game ball is discharged from the drop opening 940A to the dollar box. On the other hand, when the first opening / closing lid 920B is in the closed state, the game ball of the storage unit 930E remains as it is without dropping from the first opening 930F, and is guided to the rectifying unit 930C. Further, when the player opens the second opening / closing lid 953B of the main body 920 by operating the second lid opening / closing portion 950B, the game balls arranged in the alignment portion 920A are discharged downward through the second opening 930G. The The discharged game ball is guided to the drop opening 940A located immediately above the dollar box through the ball removal passage member 940, and the game ball is discharged from the drop opening 940A to the dollar box. On the other hand, when the second opening / closing lid 953B is in the closed state, the game balls arranged in the alignment portion 920A are guided from the introduction port 920Ab to the internal launching device 15 without falling from the second opening portion 930G.

  The cover portion 930 </ b> A of the tray cover member 930 is located on the rear end side of the tray unit 900 at a position on the right side opposite to the side where the payout port 901 (ball delivery receiving member 902) is arranged. The outer wall 930Aa of the cover portion 930A is formed in a curved shape, and an opening 930Ab is formed at a portion corresponding to the right end portion of the alignment portion 920A. Further, the outer peripheral portion 930B is formed in a curved shape generally along the outer wall 930Aa so as to form a rectifying portion 930C with the outer wall 930Aa. Thereby, rectification | straightening part 930C is formed as a channel | path which guide | induces, curving the game ball of the storage part 930E to opening 930Ab. Further, the outer wall portion 930Ea of the storage portion 930E and the outer peripheral portion 930B of the rectifying portion 930C have one continuous surface so that the game ball released from the payout port 901 rolls while reaching the rectifying portion 930C. Forming. Thereby, in a state where the game ball is not stored in the storage unit 930E, the released game ball rolls up to the outer wall unit 930Ea and is rectified while changing the direction on the continuous surface (outer wall unit 930Ea, outer peripheral unit 930B). Guided to part 930C. Here, the first opening 930F that can discharge the game ball to the outside of the storage unit 930E and the first opening / closing lid that can be switched between a closed state in which the game ball can be stored and an open state in which the game ball can be discharged to the outside 920B is spaced a predetermined distance from the continuous surface on the inner side (game board 12A side) of the reservoir 930E so that the game ball can roll while contacting the continuous surface (outer wall portion 930Ea, outer peripheral portion 930B). Is provided. The predetermined interval is preferably at least a distance greater than the diameter of the game ball. This is to prevent all game balls released from the payout opening 901 from being discharged from the first opening 930F to the outside. For example, when there are few game balls stored, the payout opening 901 is provided. The game balls released from the ball roll while contacting the continuous surface (outer wall portion 930Ea, outer peripheral portion 930B), and do not fall from the first opening portion 930F to the rectifying portion 930C without reaching the first opening portion 930F. Therefore, even if the first opening / closing lid 920B is in an open state, the game ball almost falls from the first opening 930F, and the game ball supplied to the launching device 15 is interrupted. There is nothing.

  The rectifying unit 930C is formed to be slightly inclined downward from the storage unit 930E toward the opening 930Ab. The rectifying portion 930C is formed so as to gradually become narrower as it proceeds toward the opening 930Ab by the outer wall 930Aa and the outer peripheral portion 930B. Thereby, the game balls piled up randomly in the reservoir 930E flow into the opening 930Ab in a row gradually bent by the rectifier 930C. Further, even if there is a game ball that reaches the rectification unit 930C beyond the slope part 930D and the storage part 930E by vigorously paying out from the payout outlet 901, the game ball hits the inner surface of the curved outer peripheral part 930B. The propulsive force is weakened and guided to the opening 930Ab through the rectifying unit 930C.

  FIG. 102 is a perspective view of the main body 920, the ball extraction passage member 940, and the lid opening / closing part 950 as seen from the back side, and FIG. 103 is an exploded view of the view shown in FIG. A lid opening / closing portion 950 is provided below the main body portion 920, and a ball removal passage member 940 is provided below the lid opening / closing portion 950.

  104 is a perspective view of the ball extraction passage member 940, FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA 'in FIG. 104, and FIG. 106 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB' in FIG. As shown in FIG. 104, the ball extraction passage member 940 is formed in a substantially L shape in a top view, extends in the left-right direction as viewed from the front side, is formed in a hollow shape, and the first game ball flows down inside. Connected to the downstream end of the passage 941 and the first passage 941, extends in a direction perpendicular to the first passage 941 (front-rear direction), is formed in a hollow shape, and the game ball flows down inside, and the downstream end And a second passage 942 having a drop opening 940A that is open at the bottom. The first passage 941 and the second passage 942 are arranged so that the bottom faces are inclined downward from the upstream side toward the downstream side, so that the game balls flow down from the upstream toward the downstream.

  The first passage 941 includes a first receiving port 941a and a second receiving port 941b for guiding a game ball into the ball removal passage member 940. The first receiving port 941a is formed at the upstream end under the first opening 930F (see FIG. 103) of the main body 920 and the first opening / closing lid 953A (see FIG. 103) of the first lid opening / closing portion 950A. The upper part is open. The first receiving port 941a protrudes from the side surface of the first passage 941, is curved, and is opened upward. Thereby, the game ball dropped from the first opening 930 </ b> F can be smoothly guided into the first passage 941. The second receiving port 941b has a second opening 930G (see FIG. 103) of the main body 920 and a second opening / closing lid 953B (FIG. 103) of the main body 920 between the upstream end and the downstream end. (See below) and open upward. The second receiving port 941b protrudes from the side surface of the first passage 941, is curved, and is opened upward. Thereby, the game ball dropped from the second opening 930G can be smoothly guided to the inside of the first passage 941.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the first passage 941 forms an inclined wall 941c in which at least one side surface of two side surfaces extending in the upstream and downstream direction is inclined downward toward the bottom surface. Further, as shown in FIG. 106, the inclined wall 941c protrudes toward the other side surface from the middle toward the downstream end. That is, the inclined wall 941c protrudes toward the other side surface while being inclined downward toward the bottom surface. As a result, the width inside the first passage 941 gradually decreases from the middle toward the downstream end and toward the bottom (for example, one game ball from the width of two game balls). Min width). Thereby, for example, even if a large amount of game balls flow into the first passage 941, the game balls can be rectified in one row and flowed down to the second passage 942. In addition, the first passage 941 is inclined from the side surface on the side where the first receiving port 941a is provided on the side facing the first receiving port 941a (see FIG. 104) on the side surface extending in the upstream and downstream direction. A guide wall 941d extending in the direction is formed. Thereby, the game ball flowing in from the first receiving port 941a can be smoothly guided to the inside of the first passage 941.

  The second passage 942 includes a corner wall 942a that forms an outer corner at a connection portion of the first passage 941. The corner wall 942a is a portion that extends from the downstream end of the first passage 941 to the upstream end of the second passage 942, and is formed in a curved shape that bulges in the direction in which the game ball flows down.

  FIG. 107 is an exploded perspective view of the ball removal passage member 940. The ball removal passage member 940 is formed in a hollow shape in which a game ball can flow down by combining the first member 940a and the second member 940b with each other. The first member 940a constitutes the top surface, bottom surface, and one side surface of the first passage 941, and the top surface and two side surfaces of the second passage 942. The second member 940 b constitutes the other side surface of the first passage 941, the corner wall 942 a and the bottom surface of the second passage 942. In the first member 940a, a notch 940a 'that is notched obliquely upward from the lower end is formed at the lower end of the portion constituting the two side surfaces of the second passage 942. On the second member 940b, protrusions 940b 'that protrude obliquely upward are formed on the two side edges of the portion constituting the bottom surface of the second passage 942, respectively. The notches 940a 'and the protrusions 940b' are engaged with each other when the first member 940a and the second member 940b are combined with each other, resulting in the state shown in FIG. Therefore, even if the first member 940a and the second member 940b are not screwed, the two members can be maintained in a combined state.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the lid opening / closing part 950 includes a first lid opening / closing part 950A for opening / closing the first opening 930F of the body part 920 and a second opening 930G for opening / closing the second opening part 930G of the body part 920. 2 lid opening / closing part 950B. The first lid opening / closing portion 950A extends from the base end disposed below the main body portion 920 to the front surface side, the front end protrudes from the main body portion 920 toward the front surface, and the first holding portion 951A operable by the player, A first lid opening / closing portion main body 952A that slidably holds the proximal end side of one gripping portion 951A, and is fixed to the first gripping portion 951A, is slidably attached to the first lid opening / closing portion main body 952A, and has a first opening portion. A first open / close lid 953A that is displaceable between a closed state that closes 930F and an open state that opens the first opening 930F. Thereby, the player can displace the first opening / closing lid 953A between the opened state and the first opened portion 930F by opening and closing the first opening portion 930F by sliding the first grip 951A. The second lid opening / closing part 950B extends from the base end disposed below the main body part 920 to the front side, the front end protrudes from the main body part 920 toward the front side, and a second grip part 951B operable by the player, A second lid opening / closing portion main body 952B that slidably holds the proximal end side of the two gripping portions 951B, a closed state that is slidably attached to the second lid opening / closing portion main body 952B, and closes the second opening 930G; The second opening / closing lid 953B, which is displaceable to an open state in which the opening 930G is opened, is connected to the second gripping portion 951B and the second opening / closing lid 953B, and the second opening / closing lid is moved by sliding the second gripping portion 951B. A link portion 954 that displaces 953B between the open state and the open state. Thereby, the player can displace the second opening / closing lid 953B between the open state and the open state by opening and closing the second opening 930G by sliding the second grip 951B.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration of a gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. The electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the fourth embodiment is that the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 are connected to the main control circuit 70, and that the payout / launch control circuit 123 is full. It differs from the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the sensor 733 is connected, the two projector apparatus main bodies b2 are connected to the sub control circuit 200, and the second embodiment.

  The first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 detect each game ball that has passed through the out port 55 (see FIG. 88) as an out ball, and output a predetermined output signal to the main control circuit 70. When the full tank detection lever 732 (see FIG. 87) displaced in the back is in contact with the full tank detection sensor 733 for a predetermined time, the second guiding path 730D (see FIG. 87) is filled with game balls and becomes full. It detects that it has become, and outputs a predetermined output signal to the dispensing / firing control circuit 123. When the predetermined output signal is received, the payout / launch control circuit 123 temporarily stops payout of the game ball by the prize ball case unit 170. The full tank detection sensor 733 detects that the game ball is not clogged in the second guide path 730D when the full tank detection lever 732 is displaced to the front side and is separated from the full tank detection sensor 733. A predetermined output signal is output to the dispensing / firing control circuit 123. When the predetermined output signal is received, the payout / firing control circuit 123 resumes payout of the game ball by the prize ball case unit 170 that has been temporarily stopped.

  Similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 or gaming machine 1 of the first to third embodiments, the sub-control circuit 200 controls the projector control circuit 90 according to the rendering operation of other gaming machines and the like, and the two projector device main bodies Each of b2 is linked or linked to project irradiation light and project the irradiation light toward the back of the game board 12A or the screen part b4, thereby displaying an image as a visual effect.

  The gaming machine components such as various sensors, various devices, and other circuits connected to the main control circuit 70 are connected to the relay board 100 (see FIG. 75) accommodated in the cover member 430 (see FIG. 75). The game board 12A (see FIG. 69) is connected to the main control circuit 70 via the game board relay board 101 (see FIG. 69).

  In the pachinko machine 1 or 1A in the above embodiment, the game balls stored in the storage tray are fired onto the game board, and when a winning occurs, the game balls are paid out from the payout device to the storage tray. However, the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, a game medium such as a game ball or medal required for a game is inserted by a player, and a game is performed based on the medium, and a privilege is given based on the result of the game, such as a pachislot machine or a casino machine. The present invention can be applied to all. In other words, not only a form in which a game medium is used by a physical player's action and the game medium is paid out in accordance with the game result, but the main control circuit (main control board) itself has a game medium held by the player. The game may be managed electromagnetically so that the player can play the game medium without touching it. Further, the game media management apparatus for managing game media that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit (main control board) and that manages the game media owned by the player electromagnetically may be used. In that case, it is desirable that the game ball fired on the game board is an enclosed game machine that is not touched by the player.

  The game media management device has a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the game machine, and is connected to an external game media handling device (not shown) so that bidirectional communication is possible via a predetermined interface. It is only necessary to be able to perform an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium to be used for a game generated by a game medium lending operation or a game medium payout operation. Further, the game medium management device displays not only the actual number of game media but also the number of game media held on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or 1A, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. An owned game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the owned game medium number display device may be managed. In other words, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

  Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to direct operation, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the game media handling device and an external device. It is desirable that the player has a performance that cannot transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media unless it is via the external connection terminal board.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means that can be operated by the player, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal plate. (For example, IC card) insertion port, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a portable terminal, other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, etc., game media handling device side external connection terminal A plate may be provided (both not shown).

  As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits the valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the lending operation means. Then, the number of game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, as a result of the game, when a predetermined number of game media are acquired and the game is ended, the game media management device sets the number of game media to the game media handling device by operating any return operation means. Then, the game medium handling device discharges the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the gaming table to play a game based on the gaming medium recorded on another table.

  In this manner, by providing the above-described game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the payout device and the like inside the gaming machine as compared with the case where the gaming medium is physically provided for gaming, and the cost and manufacturing of the gaming machine Not only can the cost be reduced, but the player can be prevented from touching the game media directly, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the gaming machine can be reduced by reducing the number of devices. It will also reduce. Also, it is possible to prevent illegal acts through game media and game media slot and payout port. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the fourth embodiment, the following operational effects can be obtained. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the projector unit b can be disposed in an inclined state at a position that does not block the projection light emitted from the projection lens b2a in the direction from the front side to the back side. The installation space in the rear side direction can be reduced. Furthermore, since the main control board 70A can be accommodated in the predetermined space 405 formed between the lower portion of the projector unit b and the cover member arranged in this manner, the predetermined space 405 is not used and another place is used. Compared with the case where the main control board 70A is provided, the space can be saved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of saving the space of the back mechanism.

  Further, the projector unit b is arranged such that one end side provided with the projection lens b2a is disposed on the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the opposite end is disposed on the back side, and the one end side is disposed on the opposite end. By providing lower than the part side, the waste heat from the projector unit b can be released obliquely upward without being trapped in the back mechanism of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. It is possible to prevent adverse effects on precision parts.

  As a result, the main control board 70A can be accommodated in the recess 431a of the cover member 430, so that the main control board 70A can be accommodated from the waste heat of the projector unit b while the main control board 70A is stored in the predetermined space 405 below the projector unit b. And the adverse effect on the main control board 70A due to the waste heat can be prevented. In addition, by accommodating the main control board 70A in the cover member 430 disposed on the outside, maintenance of the component parts is facilitated.

  Further, since the projector unit b and the mirror member b3 can be attached to the attachment base 420 provided between the attachment frame 410 and the cover member 430, it is necessary to provide the mirror member b3 so as to protrude from the front of the attachment frame 410. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately projecting irradiation light on a screen without impairing the beauty of the pachinko gaming machine 1A.

  Further, the width of the mounting base 420 is narrowed from the front side to the back side so that the main board 70A can be accommodated in the back surface portion 431 of the cover member 430, and the side surface 432 of the cover member 430 is different from the main board 70A. Since the relay board 100 can be accommodated, a limited space inside the gaming machine can be used effectively. Further, the cover member 430 is formed so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member 430 to the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and the main control board 70A is accommodated so as not to protrude from the surface of the cover member 430 to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. A possible recess 431a was provided. Thereby, by accommodating the main control board 70A in the recess 431a, it can be provided between the mounting base 420 and the surface of the cover member 430 so as not to protrude to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. It is possible to effectively use the limited space inside.

  Further, the game board 12A is detachably fixed by the movable stopper attached to the attachment frame 410 arranged on the front side, and the attachment base 420 and the cover member 430 are attached to the rear side of the attachment frame 410, so that the cover If the member 430 is not removed, it is possible to prevent an illegal act by making it difficult to access the game board movable stopper 413 provided on the mounting frame 410. In addition, since various parts provided on the back side of the game board 12A can be attached to the mounting base 420 and the cover member 430 provided on the back side of the game board 12A, for example, the game board without changing the various parts. Only 12A can be changed, and the design of the gaming machine becomes easy. When the gaming machine is assembled, the game board movable stopper 413 related to the game board 12A is attached to the side surface of the attachment frame 410, and the cover member 430 in which the main control board 70A is accommodated is attached to the back surface of the attachment frame 410. In this way, the surface to be attached is different for each large category of members, such as members related to the game board 12A and members related to the back mechanism such as the main control board 70A. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of facilitating the design change and assembling work of the gaming machine and reducing the working water in the assembling work.

  In addition, by separating which member is attached to which surface of the attachment frame 410, it is possible to prevent erroneous work in the assembly work by assembling according to the arrangement relationship (inner periphery or back side) of the members attached to the attachment frame 410. .

  Also, a mounting base 420 is provided between the mounting frame 410 and the cover member 430 that can accommodate the main control board 70A, and the projector unit b is attached to the mounting base 420, and the control board can control the gaming device on the cover member. By attaching the mounting base 410 and the fixing portion 411a that can fix the cover member 430 separately to the mounting frame 410, the shape of the mounting base 420 can be changed according to the type of gaming device. . Therefore, by constituting the member that covers the back mechanism with two members of the cover member 430 and the mounting base 420, the mounting base 420 is used for the pachinko gaming machine 1A while using the cover member 430 that is a common member. It is possible to develop a flexible model by changing the shape according to the type of gaming device according to the characteristics. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the versatility of the member that covers the back mechanism.

  Further, if the cover member 430 is not removed, the attachment base 420 to which the gaming device is attached cannot be operated, so that it is possible to prevent the gaming device from being removed from the outside due to mischief or the like.

  Further, by attaching the cover member 430 to the attachment frame 410, the rigidity of the entire gaming machine can be improved. In addition, since the member that covers the back mechanism has a double structure of the cover member 430 and the attachment base 420, the rigidity of the entire gaming machine can be further improved.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A, since at least one of the side surface portions 432 of the cover member 430 is inclined, a gaming mechanism such as the sub-control board 80A is compared with the case where the side surface portion 432 is not inclined when the depth dimension is the same. Since the installable area of the component parts becomes large, it becomes possible to attach more various game machine component parts. In addition, the sub control board 80A can be accommodated in the inclined side surface part 432 separately from the main control board 70A accommodated in the space formed by the back surface part 431 and the at least two side surface parts 432. Compared to the case where the sub-control board 80A is gathered on the back surface portion 431, it is possible to suppress the sub-control board 80A from protruding to the back surface portion 431 of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the depth dimension.

  Further, by providing the concave portion 431 a in the back surface portion 431 of the cover member 430, the bending strength of the back surface portion 431 of the cover member 430 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the strength of the cover member that covers the back side of the gaming machine.

  Further, for example, when the main control board 70A protrudes from the back surface portion 431, when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is moved, an external force is applied to the protruding portion, and the possibility of breakage increases. According to the present invention, the main control board 70A is accommodated in the concave portion 431a, and the surface of the back surface portion 431 is made substantially flush with each other, so that external force is applied to the component parts of the gaming machine during the movement of the gaming machine and the damage is caused. The possibility of doing so can be reduced.

  In addition, since at least one of the side surface portions 432 of the cover member 430 is inclined, the installation area of the gaming machine component parts such as the sub control board 80A is compared with the case where the side surface portion 432 is not inclined when the depth dimension is the same. Therefore, it becomes possible to attach more various gaming machine components. Further, at least a part of the side surface portion 432 opposite to the side pivotally supported by the main body 2 is located inside the virtual circle VC passing through the inner side edge of the main body frame 400 with the main body frame hinge 2b as the center. Since it is formed, the space inside the cover member 430 can be widened and more gaming machine components can be arranged within a range in which the inside of the main body 2 can be rotated. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the depth dimension.

  Further, since at least a part of the side surface portion 432 of the cover member 430 is formed in a shape along the virtual circle VC, the space inside the cover member 430 is further widened within a range in which the inside of the main body 2 can be rotated. Many gaming machine components can be arranged.

  In addition, since at least one of the side surface portions 432 of the cover member 430 is inclined, the installation area of the gaming machine component parts such as the sub control board 80A is compared with the case where the side surface portion 432 is not inclined when the depth dimension is the same. Therefore, it becomes possible to attach more various gaming machine components. Further, in the cover member 430, the wiring from the game board relay board 101 of the game board 12 </ b> A accommodated in the space formed by the back face part 431 and the at least two side face parts 432 is provided in the opening part 432 e of the cover member 430. It is provided so as to be connectable to the relay board 100 provided on the outside, and the side board first recess 432a can accommodate the relay board 100 connected to the wiring via the opening 432e. The recesses 431a and the second side recesses 432c that can accommodate the control board 70A and the sub-control board 80A are adjacent to each other. Thereby, even if it is possible to attach more various main control boards 70A, it is possible to collect and arrange various gaming machine components and shorten the cables connecting them. Therefore, it is easy to check various game machine components and route cables. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can simplify the assembly work and maintenance of the gaming machine.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A, a game that becomes a prize ball in the first guide path 730C leading from the ball delivery mechanism 720 to the discharge port 730B inside the payout device 700, for example, due to a blockage of the payout outlet of the storage tray. Even if the flow of the ball stagnates and clogs occur, the game ball from the ball delivery mechanism 720 detours to the second guide path 730D through the branch path 730E branched from the upper middle of the first guide path 730C and the through-hole 731A. Even if the second guiding path 730D is filled with game balls, the first guiding path 730C and the second guiding path 730D are removed when the closed state near the payout port (discharge port 730B) is resolved. A large number of game balls that have been filled in can be immediately collected and discharged from the discharge port 730B. That is, it is possible to prevent the ball of the game ball from being clogged inside the payout device 700 by delaying as much as possible until the second guiding path 730D becomes full.

  In addition, since the first guide path 730C and the second guide path 730D are provided inside the payout device 700, there is no possibility that the game ball in the guide path is directly touched by the player's hand, and the game ball is caused by an external factor. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of ball clogging.

  Further, in the cover member 430, the ball passage unit 730 and the board accommodating portion can be formed as an integral unit, and the control board is arranged from the center of the cover member 430, so that the wiring route is flexible. It is also possible to confirm whether fraud has been performed on the control board.

  Further, until the second guiding path 730D is full and the stagnation of the game ball is detected by the full tank detection lever 732 and the full tank detection sensor 733, the ball delivery mechanism 720 serves as a prize ball corresponding to the winning prize. You can continue to play game balls. Therefore, even if the tank becomes full, the payout operation can be continued without being interrupted immediately, and more game balls can be stored in the payout device 700. In addition, by changing the lateral width of the first guide path 730C and the second guide path 730D, it becomes possible to change the storage amount and flow rate of game balls in the first guide section and the second guide section, and more It is possible to adjust so that an appropriate payout operation can be performed.

  Further, the second guiding path 730D is provided side by side so as to overlap the first guiding path 730C, thereby effectively securing a space without greatly expanding the occupied space of the second guiding path 730D provided separately. Can be used. Thereby, it can contribute to size reduction of the payout apparatus 700 whole with the ball path unit 730.

  In addition, the game balls stored in a full state in the second guide path 730D can be guided so as to join the discharge port 730B. As a result, a large number of game balls can be discharged from one discharge port 730B together with the game balls on the first guide path 730C, and the balls of game balls in the payout device 700 can be clogged as quickly as possible. Can be resolved.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the projecting piece member 830 separates the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850, but allows the game balls to enter the deeper play space portions 810D and 820D. Since the game balls of 810D and 820D can be shaken down to one of the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850 along the bottom surface 810Da and 820Da while contacting the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830, the ball detection unit In the interior of 800, the game balls do not bite with each other, and as a result, the game balls can be effectively prevented from being clogged in the vicinity of the out port 55.

  Further, since the projecting piece member 830 can guide the game balls to be distributed from the near side to the back along the direction in which the game balls enter, there is no possibility that the game balls may bite between the first and second. A game ball can be smoothly guided to either the detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850.

  Further, since the upper end 830A of the projecting piece member 830 is formed so as to rise (raise) toward the back side, it allows as much as possible while allowing the game ball to enter the play space portions 810D and 820D. It is possible to make it easier to gradually drop the game ball to either the first detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850, and at the front side portion of the upper end 830A, the first detection is performed without restricting the traveling direction of the game ball. It can be guided to both the sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850.

  Further, the projecting piece member 830 separates the first detection sensor 840 and the second detection sensor 850, but does not completely separate them, and the upper end 830A has a ridge shape, so that it does not catch the game ball that has entered. It can be smoothly guided to either the first detection sensor 840 or the second detection sensor 850.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the game board relay board 101 is erected at a substantially right angle with respect to the game board 12A. The installation space for the relay substrate 101 can be reduced. Further, by covering the first big prize opening solenoid 53b with the cover member 430, it is possible to protect the connection portion between the first big prize opening solenoid 53b and the game board relay board 101. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of protecting the board from external impacts while suppressing the board installation space on the back side of the game board.

  The cover member 430 is provided with an opening at a position corresponding to the game board relay board 101, and the game board relay board 101 can be connected to the connector connecting portion 101a from the outside of the cover member 430 through the opening. And at least the outer part of the game board relay board 101 was covered with a cover member. For this reason, while protecting the game board relay board 101 from external impact, the connector connected to the game board relay board 101 is pulled out of the cover member 430, or the game board relay board is attached with the cover member 430 attached. Since the connector can be attached to and detached from 101, it is possible to improve the workability of assembly and maintenance of the gaming machine.

  Further, since the game board relay board 101 is erected substantially perpendicular to the game board 12A, the space for installing the game board relay board 101 on the back side of the game board 12A compared to the case where the game board 12A is mounted on the surface. Can be suppressed. Further, the game board relay board 101 can be folded so as to be parallel to the game board 12A, so that the game board 12A to which the game board relay board 101 is attached can be transported or stacked as necessary. Since the game board relay board 101 is folded, the possibility that an external force is applied to the game board relay board 101 is lower than the case where the game board relay board 101 is left protruding vertically from the game board 12A. Thus, the risk that the game board relay board 101 is damaged can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the risk of damaging the board while suppressing the board installation space on the back side of the game board.

  Further, the cover member 430 is provided with an opening 432e at a position corresponding to the game board relay board 101, and the game board relay board 101 is connected to the connector connection part 101a from the outside of the cover member 430 through the opening 432e. Is arranged so that the wiring insertion port 101b of the connector connecting portion 101a faces in the direction of the opening portion 432e with the cover member 430 covering at least the outer portion of the game board relay board 101. did. For this reason, while protecting the game board relay board 101 from external impact, the connector connected to the game board relay board 101 is pulled out of the cover member 430, or the game board relay board is attached with the cover member 430 attached. Since the connector can be attached to and detached from 101, it is possible to improve the workability of assembly and maintenance of the gaming machine.

  In addition, since at least one of the side surface portions 432 of the cover member 430 is inclined, the installation area of the gaming machine component parts such as the sub control board 80A is compared with the case where the side surface portion 432 is not inclined when the depth dimension is the same. Therefore, it becomes possible to attach more various gaming machine components. Further, since the gaming machine components can be accommodated in the inclined side surface portion 432, the gaming machine components protrude from the back surface portion 431 of the gaming machine as compared with the case where the gaming machine components are gathered in the back surface portion 431. It becomes possible to suppress this. Further, by providing an opening 432e at a position corresponding to the game board relay board 101 in the inclined side surface part 432, the installation space of the game board relay board 101 on the back side of the game board 12A is suppressed, and the cover member 430 is provided. It is possible to further increase the installable area of the gaming machine components in the side surface portion 432.

  Further, since the game board relay board 101 is erected substantially perpendicular to the game board 12A, the space for installing the game board relay board 101 on the back side of the game board 12A compared to the case where the game board 12A is mounted on the surface. Can be suppressed. Further, by covering the first big prize opening solenoid 53b with the cover member 430, it is possible to protect the connection portion between the first big prize opening solenoid 53b and the game board relay board 101. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of protecting the board from external impacts while suppressing the board installation space on the back side of the game board.

  Further, the side first concave portion 432a capable of accommodating the relay substrate 100 is disposed adjacent to the side second concave portion 432c and the concave portion 431a capable of accommodating the main control board 70A and the sub control board 80A, respectively. Since the opening 432e that can be connected to the wiring from the game board 12A is provided in 432a, the components provided in the game board 12A and the main control board 70A and the sub control board accommodated in the side surface second recess 432c and the recess 431a The wiring length with each of 80A can be shortened. Therefore, it is easy to check various game machine components and route cables.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A, when the cover member 430 is attached to the attachment frame 410 in the assembly work of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the first guide rod 416 and the cover member of the attachment frame 410 are overlapped by overlapping the rough positions. The other opening of the second guide rod 434 of 430 is led to the rib 434b of the receiving part 434a of one opening, and is connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening. The game ball can flow down. As described above, even if the opening of one of the first guide rod 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide rod 434 of the cover member 430 is not precisely aligned, the rough position is aligned. By simply overlapping, the other opening is connected to the one opening so that the game ball can flow down, so that the assembly work efficiency can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the assembly work efficiency.

  Further, in the assembly operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, when the cover member 430 is attached to the attachment frame 410, the first guide rod 416 of the attachment frame 410 and the second guide rod of the cover member 430 are overlapped by roughly aligning the positions. The other opening portion of 434 is guided to the rib 434b of the receiving portion 434a of one opening portion, and the other opening portion is connected so as to be inserted into the one opening portion, thereby allowing the game ball to flow down. It becomes a state. In addition, one of the openings of the third guide rod 418 of the mounting frame 410 and the fourth guide rod of the cover member 430 is led to the rib 434b of the receiving portion 434a of one opening portion, and the other opening portion is one side. By being connected so as to be inserted into the opening, the game ball can flow down. As described above, one of the opening and the other opening of the first guide rod 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide rod 434 of the cover member 430, the third guide rod 418 of the mounting frame 410, and the cover member 430. Even if one of the fourth guide rods and the other opening are not precisely aligned, the rough position is aligned and the other opening is inserted into one opening simply by overlapping. Since the game ball can flow down, the assembly work efficiency can be improved. Furthermore, positioning at the time of attaching the cover member 430 to the attachment frame 410 is possible at two connecting portions of the first guide rod 416 and the second guide rod 434, and the third guide rod 418 and the fourth guide rod. As a result, a more accurate positioning is possible by matching the rough positions. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the assembly work efficiency.

  Further, in the assembly operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, when the cover member 430 is attached to the attachment frame 410, the first guide rod 416 of the attachment frame 410 and the second guide rod of the cover member 430 are overlapped by roughly aligning the positions. A state in which the game ball can flow down by connecting one of the other openings 434 to the rib 434b of the receiving part of one opening and inserting the other opening into the one opening. It becomes. In addition, one of the opening portions of the third guide rod 418 of the mounting frame 410 and the fourth guide rod of the cover member 430 is led to the rib 434b of the receiving portion of one opening portion, and the other opening portion is one of the opening portions. By being connected so as to be inserted into the opening, the game ball can flow down. As described above, one of the opening and the other opening of the first guide rod 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide rod 434 of the cover member 430, the third guide rod 418 of the mounting frame 410, and the cover member 430. Even if one of the fourth guide rods and the other opening are not precisely aligned, the rough position is aligned and the other opening is inserted into one opening simply by overlapping. Since the game ball can flow down, the assembly work efficiency can be improved. Furthermore, positioning at the time of attaching the cover member 430 to the attachment frame 410 is possible at two connecting portions of the first guide rod 416 and the second guide rod 434, and the third guide rod 418 and the fourth guide rod. As a result, a more accurate positioning is possible by matching the rough positions. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the assembly work efficiency.

  Further, when the cover member 430 is attached to the attachment frame 410 in the assembly work of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the rough positions are overlapped. At this time, even if the positions of the openings are slightly deviated from each other, the cover member 430 is pushed in so that the other opening is guided to the inclination of the rib 434b of one opening, and the inner edge side from the outer edge of the rib 434b. To the part surrounded by the inner edge, connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening, and the game ball can flow down. As described above, even if the opening of one of the first guide rod 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide rod 434 of the cover member 430 is not precisely aligned, the rough position is aligned. By simply overlapping, the other opening is connected to the one opening so that the game ball can flow down, so that the assembly work efficiency can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the assembly work efficiency.

  Further, in the assembly operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, when the cover member 430 is attached to the attachment frame 410, the first guide rod 416 of the attachment frame 410 and the second guide rod of the cover member 430 are overlapped by roughly aligning the positions. The engaging portion 416a of the other opening portion of 434 is guided to the rib 434b of the receiving portion 434a of the one opening portion, and is fitted into the portion surrounded by the rib 434b at the connection position, and is fitted to the one opening portion. By connecting the other opening so as to be inserted, the game ball can flow down. As described above, even if the opening of one of the first guide rod 416 of the mounting frame 410 and the second guide rod 434 of the cover member 430 is not precisely aligned, the rough position is aligned. By simply overlapping, the other opening is connected to the one opening so that the game ball can flow down, so that the assembly work efficiency can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the assembly work efficiency.

  When the other opening is guided by the rib 434b of one opening, the outer edge of the opening of the other opening abuts on the rib 434b. At this time, a force is applied to the outer edge of the opening, It may be deformed, and there is a risk of hindering the flow of the game ball after connection. According to the present invention, by providing the engaging portion 416a on the outer edge of the opening of the other opening, the engaging portion 416a is brought into contact with the rib 434b, and the force applied to the outer edge of the opening is reduced. It becomes possible to prevent the hindrance of the ball flow.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the game ball released from the payout opening 901 rolls along the outer wall portion 930Ea while rolling along the continuous curved outer peripheral portion 930B. The alignment portion 920A is guided to the upstream side in the alignment direction. In the alignment portion 920A, a plurality of game balls are aligned to form a straight line and guided to the introduction port 920Ab. At that time, even when the first opening / closing lid 953A provided in the first opening 930F is in the open state, the game ball released from the payout port 901 does not fall into the first opening 930F, and the outer wall 930Ea Rolling along the portion 930B is guided from the rectifying portion 930C to the alignment portion 920A. Therefore, the outer wall portion 930Ea of the storage portion 930E and the alignment portion 920A are prevented from falling from the first opening portion 930F while ensuring a relatively long path length from the outlet 901 to the alignment portion 920A by the rectifying portion 930C. The outer peripheral portion 930B is formed at a predetermined interval from the first opening 930F, and the outer peripheral portion 930B is formed in a curved shape, so that it smoothly falls and discharges from the rectifying portion 930C to the alignment portion 920A. It is possible to guide the game ball without making it.

  Further, the game balls released from the payout opening 901 are guided to bypass the rectifying unit 930C without directly reaching the aligning unit 920A, and then guided from the rectifying unit 930C to the aligning unit 920A. Are guided to the inlet 920Ab in a state of being straightly aligned. Also by this, it is possible to guide the game ball from the rectifying unit 930C to the aligning unit 920A without smoothly clogging the balls.

  Further, since the rectifying portion 930C and the alignment portion 920A are formed on the outer side and the inner side of the cover portion 930A, this also ensures a relatively long path length from the payout opening 901 to the alignment portion 920A, The width dimension and installation space of the whole dish unit 900 can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is possible to prevent the released game balls from riding on the game balls aligned with the aligning portion 920A, causing the alignment to be disturbed and causing the balls to be jammed or the game balls to jump out of the dish unit 900.

In addition, by forming the curved rectifying portion 930C, it is possible to secure a relatively long path length from the discharge outlet 901 to the alignment portion 920A, so that the width dimension and installation space of the entire dish unit 900 can be reduced. The game balls can be smoothly guided from the rectifying unit 930C to the aligning unit 920A.
In this embodiment, the alignment portion 930C is formed between the outer wall 930Aa and the outer peripheral portion 930B of the cover portion 930A of the tray cover member 930 itself, but a cover member that simply covers the alignment portion is provided. You may make it provide a slope part and a storage part other than an alignment part between the outer side of this cover member, and the curved inner peripheral part of the tray unit main-body part.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. In the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine has been described as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The various techniques of the present invention described above can be applied to other gaming machines, for example, a ball game machine and an enclosed game machine. In addition to the gaming machines listed above, general-purpose technology can be applied to various gaming machines such as gaming machines, slot machines, and pachislot gaming machines.

  The numerical values, information, components, and the like shown in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that they can be changed as appropriate within the scope of the present invention.

  Based on the above embodiment, the outline | summary of this invention is enumerated below.

(About Appendix 1)
Some conventional gaming machines project an image from a projector onto a polyhedral structure arranged on a gaming board (see, for example, JP-A-2015-205001). A structure on a game board generally includes a light emitter such as an LED. In addition, this type of structure may operate as a movable body.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if light is projected from the projector in order to project an image on the light emitting area of the light emitter in the structure (movable body), it is likely to be visually recognized as white and blurred. This is presumably because the light of the image reflected on the structure is mixed with the light from the light emitter, and the brightness is enhanced by additive color mixing. As a result, a clear image could not be projected, and there was a difficulty in deteriorating aesthetics in the production.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of projecting a clear image and enhancing aesthetics as a production effect.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A movable body that can be operated as a production (for example, a movable accessory 68),
A light emitting means (for example, LED 681) provided on the movable body and capable of emitting light as an effect;
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling the operation of the movable body, the light emission by the light emitting means, and the projection of an image by the projection means. Because
The movable body is
A cover member (for example, a cover member 684) that covers the light emitting unit and has a transmission region through which light from the light emitting unit can be transmitted;
The production control means includes
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, an area other than the transmissive area of the cover member (for example, a non-transmissive member 685) or the transmissive area where light from the light emitting unit is not transmitted is set as a projection target. The image can be projected by the projection means.

  According to such a configuration, the light of the reflected image and the light from the light emitter are not mixed in the region other than the transmission region or the transmission region of the cover member, and the brightness is not enhanced by additive color mixing. Therefore, a clear image can be projected on the cover member of the movable body, and the beauty can be enhanced as a production effect.

A gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention,
A movable body that can be operated as a production (for example, a movable accessory 68),
A light emitting means (for example, LED 681) provided on the movable body and capable of emitting light as an effect;
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling the operation of the movable body, the light emission by the light emitting means, and the projection of an image by the projection means. Because
The movable body is
A cover member (for example, a cover member 684) that covers the light emitting unit and has a transmission region through which light from the light emitting unit can be transmitted;
The production control means includes
When the light emitting unit does not emit light, the projection unit can project an image with at least the transmission region of the cover member as a projection target.

  According to such a configuration, the light of the image reflected from the transmission region of the cover member and the light from the light emitter are not mixed, and the brightness is not enhanced by additive color mixture. A clear image can be projected on the transparent area of the screen, and the beauty can be enhanced as a production effect.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The cover member has at least a part of a non-transmissive region (for example, non-light emitting region 684b, 684b ′) that does not transmit light from the light emitting means as a region other than the transmissive region,
The production control means can project an image by the projection means including the non-transparent area of the cover member as a projection target.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to project a clear image even in the non-transparent region of the cover member, and it is possible to enhance the beauty as a production effect.

Other preferred embodiments of the present invention include:
The cover member has the non-transmissive region in a peripheral portion,
The production control means can project an image by the projection means with at least a part of the peripheral edge of the cover member as a projection target.

  According to such a structure, a clear image | video can be projected also on the peripheral part of a cover member, and beauty can be heightened as a production effect.

(About Appendix 2)
Some conventional gaming machines project an image from a projector onto a polyhedral structure arranged on a gaming board (see, for example, JP-A-2015-205001). A structure on a game board generally includes a light emitter such as an LED. In addition, this type of structure may operate as a movable body.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if light is projected from the projector in order to project an image on the light emitting area of the light emitter in the structure (movable body), it is likely to be visually recognized as white and blurred. This is presumably because the light of the image reflected on the structure is mixed with the light from the light emitter, and the brightness is enhanced by additive color mixing. As a result, a clear image could not be projected, and there was a difficulty in deteriorating aesthetics in the production.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of projecting a clear image and enhancing aesthetics as a production effect.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A movable body that can be operated as a production (for example, a movable accessory 68),
A light emitting means (for example, LED 681) provided on the movable body and capable of emitting light as an effect;
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) provided with an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling the operation of the movable body, the light emission by the light emitting means, and the projection of an image by the projection means. Because
The movable body is
A cover member (for example, a cover member 684) that covers the light emitting unit and has a transmission region through which light from the light emitting unit can be transmitted;
The production control means includes
When projecting an image by the projection unit with the transmission region of the cover member as a projection target, the light emission unit emits light with a relatively lower luminance than when the projection unit does not project the image. It is possible.

  According to such a configuration, the degree of mixing of the light of the image reflected from the transmission region of the cover member and the light from the light emitter is reduced, and the enhancement of the brightness due to additive color mixing is suppressed. A clear image can be projected on the transmission area, and the beauty can be enhanced as a production effect.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The cover member has at least a part of a non-transmission area (for example, non-transmission member 685, non-light emission area 684b, 684b ′, etc.) that does not transmit light from the light emitting means as an area other than the transmission area,
The production control means can project an image by the projection means including the non-transparent area of the cover member as a projection target.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to project a clear image even in the non-transparent region of the cover member, and it is possible to enhance the beauty as a production effect.

Other preferred embodiments of the present invention include:
The cover member has the non-transmissive region in a peripheral portion,
The production control means can project an image by the projection means with at least a part of the peripheral edge of the cover member as a projection target.

  According to such a structure, a clear image | video can be projected also on the peripheral part of a cover member, and beauty can be heightened as a production effect.

(About Appendix 3)
Conventionally, this type of gaming machine is provided with an electronic shutter in front of the symbol display area, and by reducing the transmittance of the electronic shutter, the symbol display area is made a non-transparent area and the design is hidden. (For example, refer to JP 2009-55942 A).

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, even if the transmittance is maximized by not operating the electronic shutter in a normal state, the symbol must be visually recognized through the electronic shutter itself, so that the symbol as identification information looks dim. However, it was difficult to ensure visibility in a timely manner.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is possible to ensure visibility in a timely manner while enabling an effect such as hiding identification information, and as a result, a game that can enhance aesthetics as an effect. The purpose is to provide a machine.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A movable body (for example, a reel accessory 67) that is provided with identification information (for example, an identification symbol) and is operable as an effect,
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
An effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) capable of controlling the operation of the movable body and the projection of an image by the projection means,
The movable body is
A sheet member (for example, a sheet member 671) on which the identification information is drawn;
Moving means (for example, a rotating gear 673, a motor 674, etc.) for moving the sheet member,
The sheet member is
A drawing area of identification information (for example, blue 7 (671A), red 7 (671B), etc.);
A background area other than the drawing area (for example, a blank 671C),
The drawing area is formed based on a first color system (for example, red or blue),
The background region is formed based on a second color system (for example, white or gray) different from the first color system,
The production control means includes
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, an image can be projected onto the sheet member by the projection unit with a color similar to the first color system.

  According to such a configuration, by projecting an image with the same color as the first color system of the drawing area where the identification information is drawn on the sheet member, the identification information seems to be merged with the image of the similar color. This makes it difficult to see or difficult to see, but if you do not project such images, the identification information will be visible directly, so that you can hide the identification information while ensuring visibility in a timely manner. As a result, the beauty can be enhanced as a production effect.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The movable body includes a light emitting means (for example, LED 677) capable of irradiating light from the back side to the front side of the sheet member,
The production control means includes
The light emission by the light emitting means can be controlled,
When projecting an image on the sheet member by the projection unit, the light emission by the light emitting unit can be stopped, or the luminance of light emission is relatively lowered by the light emitting unit than when the projection unit does not project an image. Further, it is possible to emit light.

  According to such a configuration, the light of the image reflected on the sheet member and the light from the light emitting means are not mixed or the degree thereof is weakened, and the enhancement of lightness due to additive color mixing is suppressed. The drawing area can be sufficiently blended with the image of the similar color, and the identification information can be surely hidden.

(About Appendix 4)
Conventionally, this type of gaming machine is provided with an electronic shutter in front of the symbol display area, and by reducing the transmittance of the electronic shutter, the symbol display area is made a non-transparent area and the design is hidden. (For example, refer to JP 2009-55942 A).

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, even if the transmittance is maximized by not operating the electronic shutter in a normal state, the symbol must be visually recognized through the electronic shutter itself, so that the symbol as identification information looks dim. However, it was difficult to ensure visibility in a timely manner.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and it is possible to ensure visibility in a timely manner while enabling an effect such as hiding identification information, and as a result, a game that can enhance aesthetics as an effect. The purpose is to provide a machine.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A movable body (for example, a reel accessory 67) that is provided with identification information (for example, an identification symbol) and is operable as an effect,
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), comprising: an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81) capable of controlling the operation of the movable body and projection of an image by the projection means;
The movable body is
A sheet member (for example, a sheet member 671) on which the identification information is drawn;
Moving means (for example, a rotating gear 673, a motor 674, etc.) for moving the sheet member,
The sheet member is
A drawing area of identification information (for example, blue 7 (671A), red 7 (671B), etc.);
A background area other than the drawing area (for example, a blank 671C),
The drawing area is formed based on a first color system (for example, red or blue),
The background region is formed based on a second color system (for example, white or gray) different from the first color system,
The production control means includes
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a series of presentation operations (for example, pseudo-continuous) that are stopped after the sheet member is moved by the moving unit can be continuously executed,
A first effect state in which identification information of the drawing area can be visually recognized when the sheet member is stopped;
It is controllable to a second effect state in which an image is projected onto the sheet member with the same color as the first color system by the projection means when the sheet member is stopped or moved. To do.

  According to such a configuration, in the first production state in which the sheet member is continuously moved and stopped a plurality of times and the sheet member stops, the identification information of the drawing area can be directly visually recognized, for example, the last When the sheet member is stopped or in the second production state during rotation, the image is projected on the sheet member with a color similar to the first color system of the drawing area, so that the identification information is merged with the image of the similar color. This makes it impossible to visually recognize or difficult to visually recognize, so that it is possible to ensure visibility in a timely manner while enabling an effect of hiding the identification information, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the aesthetic appearance.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The movable body includes a light emitting means (for example, LED 677) capable of irradiating light from the back side to the front side of the sheet member,
The production control means includes
The light emission by the light emitting means can be controlled,
In the second effect state, the light emission by the light emitting means can be stopped, or the light emission means can emit light after lowering the luminance of light emission relative to the first effect state.

  According to such a configuration, the light of the image reflected on the sheet member and the light from the light emitting means are not mixed or the degree thereof is weakened, and the enhancement of lightness due to additive color mixing is suppressed. The drawing area can be sufficiently blended with the image of the similar color, and the identification information can be surely hidden.

(About Appendix 5)
Some conventional gaming machines project an image from a projector onto a polyhedral structure arranged on a gaming board (see, for example, JP-A-2015-205001). A structure on a game board generally includes a light emitter such as an LED. In addition, this type of structure may operate as a movable body.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if light is projected from the projector in order to project an image on the light emitting area of the light emitter in the structure (movable body), it is likely to be visually recognized as white and blurred. This is presumably because the light of the image reflected on the structure is mixed with the light from the light emitter, and the brightness is enhanced by additive color mixing. As a result, a clear image could not be projected, and there was a difficulty in deteriorating aesthetics in the production.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of projecting a clear image and enhancing aesthetics as a production effect.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 13) having a display area (for example, the display area 13a) capable of displaying an image as an effect;
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling display of an image by the display means and projection of a video by the projection means,
The display means includes
A predetermined image can be displayed in a predetermined drawing area in the display area;
The production control means includes
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, an image can be projected by the projection unit with at least a region other than the predetermined drawing region in the display region as a projection target.

  According to such a configuration, the light of the reflected video and the light of the display image are not mixed in the region other than the predetermined drawing region in the display region, and the brightness is not enhanced by the additive color mixture. Thus, a clear video can be projected on the display area of the display means, and the beauty can be enhanced as a production effect.

A gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention,
Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 13) having a display area (for example, the display area 13a) capable of displaying an image as an effect;
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling display of an image by the display means and projection of a video by the projection means,
The display means includes
A predetermined image can be displayed in a predetermined drawing area in the display area;
The production control means includes
When the predetermined image is not displayed in the predetermined drawing area in the display area, an image can be projected by the projection unit with at least the predetermined drawing area as a projection target.

  According to such a configuration, the light of the image reflected from the predetermined drawing area in the display area does not mix with the light of the display image, and the brightness is not enhanced by additive color mixing. A clear image can be projected on the area, and the beauty can be enhanced as a production effect.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
At least a part of the area other than the predetermined drawing area where the image is projected by the projection unit is displayed in a single display color of black or gray.

  According to such a configuration, by projecting an image on a black or gray region, the contrast and visibility of the projected image can be increased, and as a result, the beauty can be enhanced.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
When the predetermined image is not displayed in the predetermined drawing area in the display area, the predetermined drawing area is in a single display state in black.

  According to such a configuration, by projecting an image onto a predetermined drawing area in a black display state, the contrast and visibility of the projected image can be increased, and as a result, the aesthetic appearance is enhanced. be able to.

(About Appendix 6)
Some conventional gaming machines project an image from a projector onto a transparent protective plate provided in front of the gaming board (see, for example, JP 2012-75624 A). The game board is provided with a liquid crystal display unit, and a projection image on the protection plate can be formed so as to overlap with a display image of the liquid crystal display unit.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if light is projected from the projector in order to display an image on the protective plate located in front of the liquid crystal display unit, it is likely to be visually recognized as white and blurred. This is presumably because the light of the image reflected on the protective plate and the light from the liquid crystal display unit are mixed and the brightness is increased by additive color mixing. As a result, a clear image could not be projected, and there was a difficulty in deteriorating aesthetics in the production.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of projecting a clear image and enhancing aesthetics as a production effect.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 13) having a display area (for example, the display area 13a) capable of displaying an image as an effect;
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
A movable body that can be operated as an effect (for example, a decorative portion 68A of the movable accessory 68);
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that includes display of an image by the display unit, projection of a video by the projection unit, and presentation control unit (for example, a sub CPU 81) that can control the operation of the movable body. Etc.) and
The production control means includes
The movable body is movable so as to be positioned in front of the display area,
An image can be projected from the front side of the movable body as a projection target by the projection means,
The predetermined image related to the image projected on the movable body can be displayed in a predetermined drawing area (for example, a non-overlapping area) not corresponding to the position of the movable body in the display area. In an area other than the drawing area (for example, an overlapping area), the image can be hidden or can be formed based on a predetermined color system.

  According to such a configuration, an integral display image can be formed by the video projected on the movable body and the predetermined image displayed in the predetermined drawing area. In addition, the light of the image reflected by the movable body and the light of the predetermined image are not mixed, and the projected image light is easily reflected even in an area other than the predetermined drawing area. Since the brightness is not emphasized, a clear video can be displayed on the movable body located in front of the display area, and the beauty can be enhanced as a production effect.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The movable body includes light emitting means (for example, LED 681) that can emit light as an effect,
The production control means includes
When projecting an image on the movable body by the projection unit, the light emission by the light emitting unit can be stopped, or the luminance of the light emission is relatively lowered by the light emitting unit than when the projection unit does not project an image. Further, it is possible to emit light.

  According to such a configuration, the light of the image reflected by the movable body and the light from the light emitting means are not mixed or the degree thereof is weakened, and the enhancement of the brightness due to the additive color mixture is suppressed. Therefore, the video can be clearly displayed and the visibility of the video and the image can be ensured.

(About Appendix 7)
Conventionally, this type of gaming machine is provided with an electronic shutter in front of the symbol display area, and by reducing the transmittance of the electronic shutter, the symbol display area is made a non-transparent area and the design is hidden. (For example, refer to JP 2009-55942 A).

  However, in the above conventional gaming machine, only the design as identification information is made visible / invisible by changing the transmittance of the electronic shutter, so that only a visual monotonous effect can be obtained, There was the difficulty that the interest of the production was lacking.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can visually produce a variety of effects and can enhance the effects of the effects.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
Display means capable of displaying an image as an effect (for example, the front liquid crystal device 13 ');
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
A structure (for example, a movable accessory 68) disposed on the back side of the display means;
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), including an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 81 or the like) capable of controlling display of an image by the display means and projection of a video by the projection means,
The display means includes
While having the back side visible, it has a transmissive display area (for example, the front liquid crystal panel 13C) capable of displaying an image,
The structure is disposed on the back side of the transmissive display area,
The production control means includes
The display means can be switched between a first state in which at least a part of the transmissive display region is not transparent or difficult and a second state in which at least a part of the transmissive display region is transparent. ,
In the first state, at least a part of the transmissive display area can be projected, and an image can be projected by the projection unit.
In the second state, it is possible to project an image by the projection unit with the structure as a projection target while watermarking at least a part of the transmissive display area.

  According to such a configuration, in the first state, the image projected on the transmissive display area and the displayed image can be directly viewed, while in the second state, the structure is seen through the transmissive display area. Since the image projected on the body can be visually recognized, various visual effects can be performed, and as a result, the interest of the effects can be enhanced.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The transmissive display area is formed based on a uniform predetermined color system (for example, black or gray) in the first state.

  According to such a configuration, the contrast and visibility of the projected image can be improved by projecting the image onto a transmissive display region that is a uniform predetermined color system such as black or gray, for example. As a result, the beauty can be enhanced as a production effect.

Other preferred embodiments of the present invention include:
The structure includes a light emitting means (for example, LED 681) that can emit light as an effect,
The production control means includes
In the second state, when the projection unit projects an image on the structure, the light emission by the light emission unit can be stopped, or the light emission unit emits light more than the case where the projection unit does not project the image. It is characterized in that it can emit light with a relatively low luminance.

  According to such a configuration, the light of the image reflected by the structure and the light from the light emitting means are not mixed or the degree thereof is weakened, and the enhancement of the brightness due to the additive color mixture is suppressed. Video can be clearly displayed, and visibility of the video can be ensured.

(About Appendix 8)
Some conventional gaming machines project an image from a projector onto a polyhedral structure arranged on a gaming board (see, for example, JP-A-2015-205001). A structure on a game board generally includes a light emitter such as an LED. In addition, this type of structure may operate as a movable body.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if light is projected from the projector in order to project an image on the light emitting area of the light emitter in the structure (movable body), it is likely to be visually recognized as white and blurred. This is presumably because the light of the image reflected on the structure is mixed with the light from the light emitter, and the brightness is enhanced by additive color mixing.

  Further, depending on the position of the structure, the projection angle of the projector becomes a wide angle, and the image becomes blurred as the projection angle becomes wider. As a result, a clear image could not be projected, and there was a difficulty in deteriorating aesthetics in the production.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of projecting a clear image and enhancing aesthetics as a production effect.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
A plurality of light emitting means (for example, decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C, etc.) capable of emitting light as an effect;
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), including an effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 81) capable of controlling light emission by the plurality of light emitting units and projection of an image by the projection unit,
The projection means is fixedly arranged at a predetermined position,
In the plurality of light emitting means,
A first light emitting means (for example, a decorative member 66A) disposed at a position where the optical distance from the projection means is the first distance;
Second light emitting means (for example, a decorative member 66C) disposed at a position where the optical distance from the projection means is a second distance longer than the first distance, and
The production control means includes
The projection means can project an image with a predetermined area (for example, the front surface of the game board 12) including at least the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means as a projection target,
At the time of projecting an image by the projection unit, at least the second light emitting unit can emit light while lowering the luminance of the emitted light compared to a case where no image is projected by the projecting unit.

  According to such a configuration, when the image is projected by the projecting unit, the light from the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit and the light of the image reflected by the predetermined area are mixed, but the projection unit The light emission brightness of the second light emitting means at a position where the optical distance is relatively long is lowered. As a result, the degree of mixing of the light from the first light emitting means and the light of the image and the degree of mixing of the light from the second light emitting means and the light of the image can be balanced. A clear image can be projected by adjusting light, and the visibility of the image can be secured.

A gaming machine according to another aspect of the present invention,
A plurality of light emitting means (for example, decorative members 66A, 66B, 66C, etc.) capable of emitting light as an effect;
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like), including an effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 81) capable of controlling light emission by the plurality of light emitting units and projection of an image by the projection unit,
The projection means is fixedly arranged at a predetermined position,
In the plurality of light emitting means,
A first light emitting means (for example, a decorative member 66A) disposed at a position that forms a first angle with respect to the projection axis (for example, the optical axis X) direction of the projection means;
Second light emitting means (for example, a decorative member 66C) disposed at a position that forms a second angle larger than the first angle with respect to the projection axis direction of the projection means,
The production control means includes
The projection unit can project an image with a predetermined area including at least the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit as a projection target;
At the time of projecting an image by the projection unit, at least the second light emitting unit can emit light while lowering the luminance of the emitted light compared to a case where no image is projected by the projecting unit.

  According to such a configuration, when the image is projected by the projection unit, the light from the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit and the light of the image reflected by the predetermined region are mixed, but the projection unit Luminance of light emission of the second light emitting means at a position where the angle with respect to the projection axis direction is relatively large is lowered. As a result, the degree of mixing of the light from the first light emitting means and the light of the image and the degree of mixing of the light from the second light emitting means and the light of the image can be balanced. A clear image can be projected by adjusting light, and the visibility of the image can be secured.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The production control means includes
When projecting an image by the projecting unit, the first light emitting unit can emit light with a lower luminance than that in the case where no image is projected by the projecting unit.
The degree of lowering the luminance of light emitted from the first light emitting means is larger than the degree of lowering the luminance of light emitted from the second light emitting means.

  According to such a configuration, when the image is projected by the projection unit, the luminance of the light emission of the first light emitting unit is also reduced, and the luminance of the light emission of the first light emitting unit is reduced by the second light emitting unit. Since the intensity of light emission is greatly reduced, the intensity of light generated by mixing these lights with the light of the image can be made as uniform as possible, and a clear image can be displayed with more uniform light intensity. be able to.

(About Appendix 9)
Some conventional gaming machines project an image from a projector onto a polyhedral structure arranged on a gaming board (see, for example, JP-A-2015-205001). A structure on a game board generally includes a light emitter such as an LED. In addition, this type of structure may operate as a movable body.

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above only makes it possible to visually recognize the image projected on the structure (movable body), so that only a monotonous visual effect can be obtained, and there is a lack of interest in the production. was there.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can visually produce a variety of effects and can enhance the effects of the effects.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 13) having a display area (for example, the display area 13a) capable of displaying an image as an effect;
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
A movable body that can be operated as a production (for example, a movable accessory 68),
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that includes display of an image by the display unit, projection of a video by the projection unit, and presentation control unit (for example, a sub CPU 81) that can control the operation of the movable body. Etc.) and
The production control means includes
The movable body is movable so as to be positioned in front of the display area,
An image can be projected from the front side of the movable body as a projection target by the projection means,
A predetermined image related to an image projected on the movable body can be displayed in a predetermined drawing area located behind the movable body in the display area.

  According to such a configuration, an image projected on the movable body can be visually recognized. On the other hand, when a predetermined drawing area located behind the movable body is looked into, a predetermined image related to the projected image is obtained. Since the image can be visually recognized, various visual effects can be performed, and as a result, the interest of the effects can be enhanced.

In a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
An image common to both the image projected on the movable body and the predetermined image can be displayed in an area other than the predetermined drawing area in the display area.

  According to such a configuration, an integral display image can be formed by the image projected on the movable body and the image displayed in common with the predetermined image.

(About Appendix 10)
Conventionally, in this type of gaming machine, a liquid crystal display panel is provided in front of the reel so that a symbol drawn on the reel can be visually recognized through a light transmission area of the liquid crystal display panel, and light is transmitted so as to overlap the symbol. There is one that can display an image in a region (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-321553).

  However, the above conventional gaming machine simply displays an image in the light transmission region together with a pattern as identification information when the reel rotation is stopped, so that only a visual monotonous effect can be obtained. There was a difficulty of lacking.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can visually produce a variety of effects and can enhance the effects of the effects.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
An identification information display means (for example, a reel accessory 67) capable of variably displaying and stopping the identification information as an effect;
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) provided with an effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 81) capable of controlling variation display and stop display of identification information by the identification information display unit and projection of an image by the projection unit 1)
The identification information display means includes a display unit (for example, an opening 12b) for displaying the identification information in a variable and stopped display.
The production control means includes
The display unit can project an image on the display unit by the projection unit during the variable display of the identification information.

  According to such a configuration, when an image is projected on the display unit during the variation display of the identification information, it can be difficult to understand whether the variation display is in progress or the stop display. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can produce an effect and thus enhance the interest of the effect.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The production control means is capable of projecting an image by the projection means up to an external peripheral area including the display section.

  According to such a configuration, an image can be projected larger than the display unit, so that a wider variety of effects can be performed.

Other preferred embodiments of the present invention include:
The effect control unit projects a predetermined image only on the display unit by the projecting unit, and then expands the predetermined image to an external peripheral area including the display unit, and then projects the projection. It is possible to project by means.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to gradually enlarge a predetermined image projected on the display unit so as to appear larger than the display unit, so that it is possible to perform more various effects.

Other preferred embodiments of the present invention include:
A game board (for example, the game board 12) having a game area (for example, the game area 12a) in which the game ball can roll,
The production control means can project an image by the projection means up to an area other than the game area.

  According to such a configuration, for example, it is possible to switch from a state in which an image is projected on the display unit to a state in which an image is projected onto an area other than the game area, so that it is possible to perform more various effects and Can be increased.

Other preferred embodiments of the present invention include:
The production control means can project the identification information as an image by the projection means.

  According to such a configuration, for example, the identification information can be physically displayed in a variable manner or stopped by the reel, and such identification information can be projected as an image, thereby enhancing the interest of the production.

(Appendix 11)
Conventionally, in this type of gaming machine, a liquid crystal display panel is provided in front of the reel so that a symbol drawn on the reel can be visually recognized through a light transmission area of the liquid crystal display panel, and light is transmitted so as to overlap the symbol. There is one that can display an image in a region (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-321553).

  However, the above conventional gaming machine simply displays an image in the light transmission region together with a pattern as identification information when the reel rotation is stopped, so that only a visual monotonous effect can be obtained. There was a difficulty of lacking.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can visually produce a variety of effects and can enhance the effects of the effects.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention,
Identification information display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 13) capable of variably displaying and stopping the identification information as an effect;
Projection means (for example, projector unit B etc.) capable of projecting video as an effect,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) provided with an effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 81) capable of controlling variation display and stop display of identification information by the identification information display unit and projection of an image by the projection unit 1)
The identification information display means includes a display unit (for example, a display area 13a) for variably displaying and stopping a plurality of pieces of identification information.
The production control means includes
During the variable display of a plurality of pieces of identification information on the display unit, a dynamic predetermined image that is linked to the variable display of the plurality of pieces of identification information can be projected onto an external peripheral area of the display unit by the projection unit. It is characterized by that.

  According to such a configuration, a predetermined dynamic image can be projected onto an area around the outside of the display unit so as to be linked to a variable display of a plurality of pieces of identification information. Thus, a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the production can be provided.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The plurality of identification information includes a plurality of numbers,
The predetermined image includes consecutive numbers or the same number for the plurality of pieces of identification information being variably displayed on the display unit.

  According to such a configuration, it seems that a plurality of consecutive numbers or a plurality of the same numbers are integrated and variably displayed beyond the display section to the outer peripheral region, so that a wider variety of effects can be achieved. It can be performed and the interest of the production can be enhanced.

Other preferred embodiments of the present invention include:
A game board having a game area in which a game ball can roll,
The identification information display means is provided on the game board,
The effect control means can project the predetermined video to an area other than the game area by the projection means.

  According to such a configuration, for example, in a game board of a pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to project a predetermined video to an area other than the game area where the visibility is not hindered by the game ball, and it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest.

(About others)
As a gaming machine, for example, a pachinko gaming machine is known (see, for example, JP 2013-13801 A). However, since this pachinko gaming machine does not have a configuration or function as a gaming machine as in the present invention, it has not been possible to improve interest. This invention is made | formed in view of such a point, and it aims at providing the game machine which can aim at the improvement of interest.

(Appendix 12)
Conventionally, there is disclosed a gaming machine in which a projection image irradiated from a projector disposed in an oblique direction when viewed from the side surface is reflected forward by a reflector on the back of a game area, and the reflected projection image is projected on a screen. (See JP 2004-33251 A). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to project the projection image irradiated from the projector onto the screen.

  However, the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-33251 requires an extra space in the depth direction, although the projector (or reflecting mirror) arranged obliquely can save space in the vertical direction. Since a triangular dead space is generated between the parts, there is a problem that the back mechanism of the gaming machine is enlarged.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of solving such problems and saving the space of the back mechanism.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a projection device that can project a predetermined image (for example, a projector unit b), a reflection unit that can reflect projection light emitted from the projection device (for example, a mirror member b3), A gaming machine (e.g., a screen unit (e.g., screen unit b <b> 4) that displays the predetermined image by projection light reflected by the reflecting unit and a cover member (e.g., cover member 430) that covers the back of the gaming machine) A pachinko machine 1A),
The projection apparatus includes a projection image generation apparatus (for example, a projector apparatus body b2) that can generate the projection light, a storage case (for example, a projector cover b1) that can store the projection image generation apparatus, and the projection image generation An irradiation unit that emits projection light from the apparatus (for example, a projection lens b2a),
The irradiation unit is provided on one end side of the housing case,
The one end side of the housing case is disposed on the front side of the gaming machine, the end opposite to the one end side is disposed on the back side, and the one end side is disposed on the opposite end side. By providing a lower space, a predetermined space (for example, space 405) is formed between the lower part of the housing case and the cover member at a position where the projection light emitted from the irradiation unit is not blocked. And
A gaming machine component (for example, main control board 70A) was accommodated in the predetermined space.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a projection device, a reflection unit, a screen unit, and a cover member. The projection device can project a predetermined image. The reflection unit can reflect the projection light emitted from the projection device. The screen unit displays a predetermined image by the projection light reflected by the reflecting unit. The cover member covers the back surface of the gaming machine. The projection device includes a projection image generation device capable of generating projection light, a housing case capable of housing the projection image generation device, and an irradiation unit that emits projection light from the projection image generation device.
The irradiation unit is provided on one end side of the storage case, and one end side of the storage case is disposed on the front side of the gaming machine and the end opposite to the one end side is disposed on the back side. In addition, by providing one end side so as to be lower than the opposite end side, it is a position that does not block the projection light emitted from the irradiating unit, and is predetermined between the lower part of the housing case and the cover member The game machine component parts were accommodated in this predetermined space.

  Accordingly, the projection apparatus can be disposed in an inclined state at a position that does not block the projection light emitted from the irradiation unit in the direction from the front side to the back side, so that the installation space from the front side to the back side of the projection apparatus can be set. Can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the gaming machine components can be accommodated in a predetermined space formed between the lower portion of the projection device and the cover member arranged in this way, a gaming mechanism in another place can be used without using the predetermined space. Space can be saved as compared with the case where a component is provided. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of saving the space of the back mechanism.

  In addition, one end side provided with the irradiation part is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, the opposite end part is arranged on the back side, and one end side is provided lower than the opposite end side. As a result, the waste heat from the projector can be released obliquely upward without being trapped in the back mechanism of the gaming machine, and this waste heat can be prevented from adversely affecting other precision parts. Become.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, the cover member is provided with a recess (for example, a recess 431a) protruding into the predetermined space,
The gaming machine component can be accommodated in the recess.

  As a result, the gaming machine component can be accommodated in the recess of the cover member, so that the gaming machine component is protected from the waste heat of the projection device while the gaming machine component is placed in a predetermined space below the projection device. It is possible to prevent adverse effects on the gaming machine components due to waste heat. Moreover, maintenance of a component becomes easy by accommodating a gaming machine component in the cover member arrange | positioned outside.

(Appendix 13)
Conventionally, a projector that projects irradiation light from the back side of the cabinet toward the front side, a reflector that is disposed on the front side of the cabinet and reflects the irradiation light projected from the projector to the back side of the cabinet, and a reflector There has been disclosed a gaming machine including a screen on which reflected light from a projector is projected from the front side (see JP-A-2006-5777). According to such a gaming machine, the irradiation light projected from the projector can be reflected by the reflector on the front side and projected onto the screen on the back side.

  However, in order to properly project the irradiation light from the projector onto the screen in a limited space inside the gaming machine, it is necessary to provide a reflector. Is provided on the front side, and there is a problem that the upper part of the gaming machine jumps forward and impairs the beauty.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to solve such problems and to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately projecting irradiation light on a screen without impairing the beauty of the gaming machine.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a projection device that can project a predetermined image (for example, a projector unit b), a reflection unit that can reflect projection light emitted from the projection device (for example, a mirror member b3), A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) including a screen unit (for example, a screen unit b4) that projects the predetermined image by projection light reflected by the reflecting unit,
An attachment frame (for example, attachment frame 410) disposed on the front side and a cover member (for example, a cover member) that is attached to the back side of the attachment frame and can accommodate gaming machine components (for example, main board 70A). 430), and a mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) provided between the mounting frame and the cover member,
The mounting base is
The projection device and the reflection unit are attached,
The widths of the side surfaces facing each other (for example, the side surface 432) are narrowed from the front side to the back side,
The cover member is formed so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member to the inside of the gaming machine, and a storage portion (the storage member that can store the gaming machine components so as not to protrude from the surface of the cover member to the back side of the gaming machine) For example, a recess 431a) was provided.

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a projection device, a reflection unit, and a screen unit. The projection device can project a predetermined image. The reflection unit can reflect the projection light emitted from the projection device. The screen unit displays a predetermined image by the projection light reflected by the reflecting unit. The gaming machine further includes an attachment frame, a cover member, and an attachment base. The mounting frame is disposed on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the attachment frame and can accommodate gaming machine components. The mounting base is provided between the mounting frame and the cover member. The mounting base is attached with the projection device and the reflecting portion, and the widths of the side surfaces facing each other are narrowed from the front side to the back side, and the cover member is inside the gaming machine from the surface of the cover member. And an accommodating portion capable of accommodating the gaming machine components so as not to project from the surface of the cover member to the back side of the gaming machine.

  Thereby, since the projection device and the reflection part can be attached to the attachment base provided between the attachment frame and the cover member, it is not necessary to provide the reflection part so as to jump out from the front of the attachment frame. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately projecting irradiation light on a screen without impairing the beauty of the above.

  Further, the width of the mounting base is narrowed from the front side to the back side, and the cover member is formed so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member to the inside of the gaming machine. An accommodating portion that can be accommodated so as not to protrude to the back side of the gaming machine is provided. Thus, by accommodating the gaming machine component in the housing portion, it can be provided between the mounting base and the surface of the cover member so as not to protrude to the back side of the gaming machine. It is possible to use the space effectively.

(Appendix 14)
Conventionally, a gaming machine in which a cover member is formed with a transparent resin so as to cover the back side of the game board and this cover member is attached to a machine frame via a hinge mechanism is disclosed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-46686). . According to such a gaming machine, various components on the back side of the gaming board can be confined in the closed space between the gaming board and the cover member.

  However, in the machine frame, there are members that can be attached in addition to the game board. When the cover member is attached to the back side of the game board as in the gaming machine of the above-mentioned JP-A-2001-46686, the game board is attached. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to secure a space, the design inside the gaming machine is restricted, and the assembling work of the gaming machine becomes complicated.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of solving such problems and facilitating the design and assembly work of the gaming machine.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention is attached to the mounting frame (for example, the mounting frame 410) disposed on the front side and the back side of the mounting frame, and can accommodate the gaming machine components (for example, the main control board 70A). A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) including a certain cover member (for example, a covering member 430),
A game board (eg, game board 12A) having a game area (eg, game area 12a);
The game board is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the mounting frame,
A movable stopper (for example, a game board movable stopper 413) for removably fixing the game board is attached to the inner surface of the mounting frame.
The cover member is attached to the back surface of the attachment frame so as to cover the movable stopper.

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an attachment frame and a cover member. The mounting frame is disposed on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the attachment frame. A movable stopper for removably fixing the game board is attached to the inner side surface of the attachment frame, and a cover member is attached to the rear surface of the attachment frame so as to cover the movable stopper.

  As a result, the game board is detachably fixed by the movable stopper attached to the attachment frame arranged on the front side, and the cover member is attached to the back side of the attachment frame. Unauthorized acts can be prevented by making it difficult to access the movable stopper provided on the frame. In addition, since various parts provided on the back side of the game board can be attached to the cover member provided on the back side of the game board, for example, it is possible to change only the game board without changing the various parts. The design of the gaming machine becomes easy. Also, when assembling the gaming machine, the movable stopper associated with the gaming board is attached to the side surface of the mounting frame, and the cover member containing the gaming machine components is attached to the back surface of the mounting frame, The member to be attached is different for each large category of member, such as a member involved in a back mechanism such as a component part of a gaming machine or the like. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of facilitating the design change and assembling work of the gaming machine and reducing the working water in the assembling work.

In addition to the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention includes:
A mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) provided between the mounting frame and the cover member;
At least one of the attachment base and the cover member is attached to the back surface of the attachment frame.

  Thus, by separating which member is attached to which surface of the mounting frame, it is possible to prevent erroneous work in the assembly work by assembling according to the arrangement relationship (inner circumference or back side) of the member attached to the mounting frame. .

(About Appendix 15)
Conventionally, a cover member for covering the back surface of the mechanism panel exposed to the rear of the main frame is provided, and a control circuit board is disposed on the surface of the bulge portion of the cover member facing the back surface of the pachinko machine. A gaming machine is disclosed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-57482). According to such a gaming machine, the control circuit board can be attached to the cover member for covering the back surface of the mechanism board.

  However, in addition to the control circuit board, a gaming device corresponding to the type of gaming machine is provided on the back side of the gaming machine. Although the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-57482 can attach a control circuit board to a cover member, when the gaming device changes depending on the model, for example, the covering member abuts on the gaming device. In some cases, the cover member cannot be attached, and the versatility of the cover member is lacking.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to solve such problems and to provide a gaming machine that can improve the versatility of a member that covers a back mechanism.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention is attached to the mounting frame (for example, the mounting frame 410) disposed on the front side and the back side of the mounting frame, and can accommodate the gaming machine components (for example, the main control board 70A). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1A) including a certain cover member (for example, cover member 430) and a mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) provided between the mounting frame and the cover member. There,
The mounting base is
A gaming device (for example, projector unit b) capable of executing control related to gaming is attached,
A control board capable of controlling the gaming device is attached to the cover member,
The mounting frame includes a fixing portion (for example, a fixing portion 411a) that can fix the mounting base and the cover member separately.

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an attachment frame, a cover member, and an attachment base. The mounting frame is disposed on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the attachment frame and can accommodate gaming machine components. The mounting base is provided between the mounting frame and the cover member. The mounting base is attached with a gaming device capable of executing control related to the game, the control member is attached to the cover member, and the mounting base and the cover member are attached to the mounting frame. The fixing part which can be fixed separately was provided.

  As a result, a mounting base is provided between the mounting frame and a cover member that can accommodate gaming machine components, a gaming device is attached to the mounting base, and a control board capable of controlling the gaming device is attached to the covering member. By providing the frame with a fixing portion that can fix the mounting base and the cover member separately, the shape of the mounting base can be changed according to the type of gaming device. Therefore, by configuring the member that covers the back mechanism with two members of the cover member and the mounting base, a gaming device that uses the cover member that is a common member and matches the mounting base to the presentation characteristics of the gaming machine By changing the shape according to the type, it becomes possible to develop a flexible model. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the versatility of the member that covers the back mechanism.

  Further, by attaching the cover member to the attachment frame, it is possible to improve the rigidity of the entire gaming machine. In addition, since the member that covers the back mechanism has a double structure of the cover member and the attachment base, the rigidity of the entire gaming machine can be further improved.

In addition to the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention includes:
The fixing portion can fix the cover member so as to cover a fixing portion between the mounting frame and the mounting base after first fixing the mounting frame and the mounting base.

  Thereby, since the attachment base to which the gaming apparatus is attached cannot be operated without removing the cover member, it is possible to prevent the gaming apparatus from being removed from the outside due to mischief or the like.

(Appendix 16)
Conventionally, a main board case for storing a main board has been arranged under the base cover attached to the board surface so as to face and cover the back surface of the board surface board, and an effect control board is installed inside the back side of the base cover. There is disclosed a gaming machine in which a housed production control board case is arranged (see JP 2014-144146 A). According to such a gaming machine, various substrates can be provided on the back side of the base cover.

  However, in recent years, since display devices such as image display devices tend to be large, cover members that cover various substrates, such as the gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2014-144146, cover the back side of the game board. When it is attached to the back surface, there is a problem that the case for accommodating the substrate protrudes greatly in the depth direction.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of solving such problems and suppressing the depth dimension.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a mounting base (for example, the mounting base 420) and a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) that can accommodate gaming machine components and covers the mounting base from the back side. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A),
The cover member has a first gaming machine component (for example, a main control board 70A) in a space formed by a back surface (for example, the back surface 431) and at least two side surfaces (for example, the side surface 432). )
The width of the back portion is formed narrower than the width of the mounting base,
The side surface portion includes an attachment portion (for example, an attachment portion 433) that can be attached to the attachment base on an end portion side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one of the side surface portions is provided with the attachment portion. Formed so as to incline from the end to the end adjacent to the back surface,
A second gaming machine component (different from the first gaming machine component) formed on the inclined side surface of the cover member so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member to the inside of the gaming machine. For example, an accommodating portion (for example, the second side concave portion 432c) that can accommodate the sub control board 80A) is provided.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an attachment base and a cover member. The cover member
The gaming machine component can be accommodated, the attachment base is covered from the back side, and the first gaming machine component can be accommodated in a space formed by the back surface portion and at least two side surface portions.
And the width | variety of a back part is formed narrower than the width | variety of an attachment base. The side surface portion includes an attachment portion that can be attached to the attachment base on the end portion side not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one side surface portion is inclined from the end portion where the attachment portion is provided to the end portion adjacent to the back surface portion. It is formed to do. In addition, a second gaming machine component that is formed on the inclined side surface outside the cover member so as to protrude from the surface of the cover member to the inside of the gaming machine and that is different from the first gaming machine component. It has a possible housing.

  Thereby, since at least one of the side surfaces of the cover member is inclined, the area where the second gaming machine component can be installed is larger when the depth dimension is the same than when the side surface is not inclined. A wider variety of gaming machine components can be attached. In addition to the first gaming machine component housed in the space formed by the back surface portion and the at least two side surface portions, the second gaming machine component can be housed in the inclined side surface portion. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the gaming machine component parts from projecting to the back side of the gaming machine as compared with the case where the gaming machine component parts are concentrated on the back surface part. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the depth dimension.

(About Appendix 17)
Conventionally, a pachinko machine 1 has an outer frame that can be fixed to an island facility, a main body frame base that is pivotally supported by the outer frame, and a transparent back cover that is rotatably supported at the rear end of the main body frame base. And a game board having a game area held on the main body frame base whose rear side is covered by the back cover, and the game area of the game board is visible from the player side and is pivotally supported to be opened and closed at the front end of the main body frame base. And a door frame are disclosed (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-223516). According to such a gaming machine, the rear end of the main body frame base can be covered with the back cover.

  However, the back cover of the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-223516 is formed of a flat plate and may be damaged when an impact is applied from the outside. A gaming machine component such as various boards is attached to the back side of the gaming machine covered with such a cover member. If the cover member is damaged, the gaming machine component may be damaged. In addition, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts may be performed on the gaming machine components from the damaged portion of the cover member.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can solve such problems and improve the strength of a cover member that covers the back side of the gaming machine.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention can accommodate a mounting base (for example, the mounting base 420) and a gaming machine component (for example, the main control board 70A), and a cover member (for example, a cover) that covers the mounting base from the back side. Member 430), and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A),
The cover member can accommodate at least a part of the gaming machine components in a space formed by a back surface portion (for example, the back surface portion 431) and at least two side surface portions (for example, the side surface portion 432). ,
The width of the back portion is formed narrower than the width of the mounting base,
The side surface portion includes an attachment portion (for example, an attachment portion 433) that can be attached to the attachment base on an end portion side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one of the side surface portions is provided with the attachment portion. Formed so as to incline from the end to the end adjacent to the back surface,
The back portion has a recess (for example, a recess 431a) that can accommodate the gaming machine components.
By housing the gaming machine component in the recess, the surface of the back surface portion is substantially flush.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an attachment base and a cover member. The cover member can accommodate the gaming machine components, covers the mounting base from the back side, and can accommodate at least a part of the gaming machine components in the space formed by the back side and at least two side parts. It is. The width of the back surface portion is formed narrower than the width of the mounting base. The side surface portion includes an attachment portion that can be attached to the attachment base on the end portion side not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one side surface portion is inclined from the end portion where the attachment portion is provided to the end portion adjacent to the back surface portion. It is formed to do.
And the back part has a recessed part which can accommodate a game machine component, and the surface of a back part becomes a substantially flush state by accommodating a gaming machine component in a recessed part.

  Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the bending intensity | strength of the back surface part of a cover member by providing a recessed part in the back surface part of a cover member. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the strength of the cover member that covers the back side of the gaming machine.

  Further, for example, when the gaming machine component protrudes from the back surface portion, when the gaming machine moves, an external force is applied to the protruding portion, and the possibility of breakage increases. According to the present invention, the gaming machine component parts are accommodated in the recesses, and the surface of the back surface part is substantially flush with each other. Can be reduced.

(Appendix 18)
Conventionally, a main board case for storing a main board has been arranged under the base cover attached to the board surface so as to face and cover the back surface of the board surface board, and an effect control board is installed inside the back side of the base cover. There is disclosed a gaming machine in which a housed production control board case is arranged (see JP 2014-144146 A). According to such a gaming machine, various substrates can be provided on the back side of the base cover.

  However, in recent years, since display devices such as image display devices tend to be large, cover members that cover various substrates, such as the gaming machine disclosed in JP-A-2014-144146, cover the back side of the game board. When it is attached to the back surface, there is a problem that the case for accommodating the substrate protrudes greatly in the depth direction.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of solving such problems and suppressing the depth dimension.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention is attached to the mounting frame (for example, the mounting frame 410) disposed on the front side and the back side of the mounting frame, and can accommodate the gaming machine components (for example, the main control board 70A). A body frame (e.g., body frame 400) having a cover member (e.g., cover member 430) and an attachment base (e.g., attachment base 420) provided between the attachment frame and the cover member;
A game comprising an outer frame (for example, the main body 2) that pivotally supports the main body frame in the vicinity of one side edge so as to be rotatable about a rotation shaft (for example, the main body frame hinge 2b) extending in the vertical direction. A machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1A),
The cover member can accommodate at least a part of the gaming machine components in a space formed by a back surface portion (for example, the back surface portion 431) and at least two side surface portions (for example, the side surface portion 432). ,
The width of the back part is formed narrower than the width of the mounting base.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a main body frame having an attachment frame, a cover member, and an attachment base, and an outer frame. The mounting frame is disposed on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the attachment frame and can accommodate gaming machine components. The mounting base is provided between the mounting frame and the cover member. The outer frame pivotally supports the main body frame in the vicinity of one side edge so as to be rotatable about a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.
The cover member can accommodate at least a part of the gaming machine components in a space formed by the back surface portion and the at least two side surface portions. The width of the back surface portion is formed narrower than the width of the mounting base. Further, the side surface portion on the other side edge side is formed inside a virtual circle that passes through the inner side edge of the outer frame with the rotation axis as the center.

  As a result, since at least one of the side surfaces of the cover member is inclined, when the depth dimension is the same, the area where the gaming machine component can be installed becomes larger than when the side surface portion is not inclined. It is possible to attach gaming machine components. In addition, since at least a part of the side surface portion opposite to the side pivotally supported by the outer frame is formed inside the virtual circle that passes through the inner side edge of the outer frame with the rotation axis of the main body frame as the center, As a result, the space inside the cover member can be widened and more gaming machine components can be arranged in a range in which the inside of the cover member can be rotated. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the depth dimension.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, in addition to the above configuration, at least a part of the side surface portion on the other side edge side is formed in a shape along the virtual circle (for example, virtual circle VC).

  As a result, at least a part of the side surface portion of the cover member is formed in a shape along the virtual circle, so that the space inside the cover member can be further widened within the range in which the inside of the outer frame can be rotated, and more games Machine component parts can be arranged.

(Appendix 19)
Conventionally, a main board case for storing a main board has been arranged under the base cover attached to the board surface so as to face and cover the back surface of the board surface board, and an effect control board is installed inside the back side of the base cover. There is disclosed a gaming machine in which a housed production control board case is arranged (see JP 2014-144146 A). According to such a gaming machine, various substrates can be provided on the back side of the base cover.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144146, since various boards are separated from each other, a cable connecting these boards becomes long, and the assembling work of the gaming machine becomes complicated. In addition, for example, when a malfunction occurs in a gaming machine and it is not possible to specify which board causes the error, it is necessary to check the boards that are separated from each other one by one, and there is a problem that maintenance becomes complicated.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can solve such problems and simplify the assembly work and maintenance of the gaming machine.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention can accommodate a mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) and a gaming machine component (for example, main control board 70A) including electrical components, and covers the mounting base from the back side. (For example, a cover member 430), a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A),
The cover member can accommodate at least a part of the gaming machine components in a space formed by a back surface portion (for example, the back surface portion 431) and at least two side surface portions (for example, the side surface portion 432). ,
The width of the back portion is formed narrower than the width of the mounting base,
The side surface portion includes an attachment portion (for example, an attachment portion 433) that can be attached to the attachment base on an end portion side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one of the side surface portions is provided with the attachment portion. Formed so as to incline from the end to the end adjacent to the back surface,
The cover member is
An opening (e.g., an opening 432e) provided so that wiring from a gaming machine component housed inside the space can be connected to a gaming machine component provided outside the cover member;
A specific accommodation part (for example, the first side recess 432a on the side surface) that is provided on the outer surface of the side surface part and can accommodate a specific gaming machine component (for example, the relay board 100) connected to the wiring via the opening. )When,
General accommodation that is provided on the outer surface of the cover member and that is configured by at least two or more accommodation units each capable of accommodating a plurality of other types of gaming machine components (for example, main control board 70A and sub control board 80A). Parts (for example, side surface second recess 432c, recess 431a),
In the general accommodation unit, at least two or more accommodation units are adjacent to the specific accommodation unit.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an attachment base and a cover member. The cover member
A gaming machine component can be accommodated, the attachment base is covered from the back side, and at least a part of the gaming machine component can be accommodated in a space formed by the back surface and at least two side surfaces.
And the width | variety of a back part is formed narrower than the width | variety of an attachment base. The side surface portion includes an attachment portion that can be attached to the attachment base on the end portion side not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one side surface portion is inclined from the end portion where the attachment portion is provided to the end portion adjacent to the back surface portion. It is formed to do. The cover member includes an opening, a specific accommodation portion, and a general accommodation portion. The opening is provided so that wiring from a gaming machine component housed in the space can be connected to a gaming machine component provided outside the cover member. The specific accommodating portion is provided on the outer surface of the side surface portion, and can accommodate a specific gaming machine component connected to the wiring via the opening. The general housing portion is provided on the outer surface of the cover member, and is configured by at least two or more housing portions each capable of housing a plurality of other types of gaming machine components. At least two or more housing portions are specified housing portions. Adjacent to.

  As a result, since at least one of the side surfaces of the cover member is inclined, when the depth dimension is the same, the area where the gaming machine component can be installed becomes larger than when the side surface portion is not inclined. It is possible to attach gaming machine components. In addition, in the cover member, an opening portion, a gaming machine component provided on the outside of the cover member with wiring from a gaming machine component housed in a space formed by the back surface portion and at least two side surfaces, and It is provided so that it can be connected, and a specific gaming machine component that is connected to the wiring through the opening can be accommodated in the specific accommodation part, and each of the other plural types of gaming machine components is accommodated in this specific accommodation part. At least two possible receptacles were adjacent. As a result, even if a wider variety of gaming machine components can be attached, a variety of gaming machine components can be aggregated and arranged, and the cable connecting them can be shortened. Therefore, it is easy to check various game machine components and route cables. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can simplify the assembly work and maintenance of the gaming machine.

(About Appendix 20)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that has a storage tray for storing game balls and includes a detour that guides the game balls paid out from the payout means to a second area different from the first area of the storage dishes. It is disclosed (see JP-A-2006-87343). According to such a gaming machine, local stagnation of the game ball in the storage tray can be suppressed.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-87343, when a bypass route exposed to the outside is blocked by the player unconsciously placing his / her hand on the storage tray, the game ball guided to the bypass route is stagnant. As a result, there is a problem that ball clogging occurs immediately inside the payout means that continues to this detour.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that solves such problems and can prevent a game ball from being blocked in the payout means by delaying it as much as possible.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention has a delivery mechanism (for example, a ball delivery mechanism 720) capable of delivering a game ball, and a discharge port (for example, a discharge port 730B) that discharges the game ball sent from the delivery mechanism. A gaming machine provided with a payout means (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out a ball,
The payout means has a ball path unit (for example, a ball path unit 730) for guiding a game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port,
The ball passage unit is
A first guiding portion (for example, a first guiding path 730C) for guiding a game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port;
A second guiding part (for example, a second guiding path 730D) is provided in the middle of the first guiding part so as to be able to receive the game ball and guides the received game ball to the discharge port while storing the received game ball.

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout means having a delivery mechanism, a discharge port, and a ball path unit. The payout means can pay out game balls. The delivery mechanism can deliver game balls. The discharge port discharges the game ball delivered from the delivery mechanism. The ball passage unit includes a first guiding portion and a second guiding portion. The first guiding unit guides the game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port. The second guiding unit can receive the game ball in the middle of the first guiding unit, and guides the received game ball to the discharge port while storing the received game ball.

  Thereby, even if the flow of the game ball in the first guide part leading from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port is stagnated, the game ball is received by the second guide part in the middle of the first guide part, and the second guide part The game balls stored in can also be led to the discharge port. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game balls from being blocked in the payout means as much as possible.

  Further, since the ball passage unit is provided inside the payout means, there is no possibility that the player's hand is directly touched, and it is possible to prevent the game ball from being clogged due to an external factor.

In addition to the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention can accommodate a mounting base (for example, mounting base 420) and gaming machine components, and covers the mounting base from the back side (for example, a cover member). 430), and
The ball passage unit is disposed at an end of the cover member,
The cover member is provided with an accommodating portion (for example, a recess 431a) capable of accommodating a control board (for example, the main control substrate 70A) on which electronic components are mounted, closer to the center than the arrangement position of the ball passage unit. Yes.

  Thereby, in the cover member, the ball passage unit and the board housing part can be formed as an integral unit, and the control board is arranged from the center of the cover member, so that the wiring route can be made flexible. It is also possible to confirm whether fraud has been performed on the control board.

(About Appendix 21)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine has been disclosed that includes a preliminary storage unit that stores game balls overflowing from a storage tray, and a payout ball detection switch that detects game balls paid out from a payout device (payout means) (special feature). (See Kaikai 2006-26246). According to such a gaming machine, when the full state of the storage tray is detected by the payout ball detection switch, it is possible to guide the game ball to the reserve storage unit and store a large amount of game balls.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-26246, since there is only one ball receiving port (discharge port for discharging game balls) of the storage tray, the player unconsciously places his hand near the ball receiving port. If the ball receiving port is blocked by a ball, etc., the ball will be clogged inside the payout device, and as a result, the payout operation will be interrupted immediately if the full ball condition is erroneously detected by the payout ball detection switch. was there.

  Therefore, the present invention solves such a problem, and even when the tank is full, the payout operation can be continued without being interrupted immediately, and a large number of game balls are stored inside the payout means. An object is to provide a gaming machine that can be used.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention has a delivery mechanism (for example, a ball delivery mechanism 720) capable of delivering a game ball, and a discharge port (for example, a discharge port 730B) that discharges the game ball sent from the delivery mechanism. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) provided with a dispensing means (for example, a dispensing device 700) capable of paying out a ball,
The payout means has a ball path unit (for example, a ball path unit 730) for guiding a game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port,
The ball passage unit is
A first guiding portion (for example, a first guiding path 730C) for guiding a game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port;
A second guiding portion (for example, a second guiding path 730D) that is provided so as to be able to receive a game ball in the middle of the first guiding portion and guides the received game ball to the discharge port while storing;
Detection means (for example, full tank detection lever 732, full tank detection sensor 733) capable of detecting the flow state of the game ball in the second guide part,
The delivery mechanism sends out the game ball until the stagnation of the game ball is detected by the detection means,
The first guide portion is formed with a first width in the lateral direction;
The second guiding portion is formed with a second width in the lateral direction,
The second guide part is upstream of the discharge port and merges with the first guide part,
The discharge port is formed with the first width in the lateral direction.

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout means having a delivery mechanism, a discharge port, and a ball path unit. The payout means can pay out game balls. The delivery mechanism can deliver game balls. The discharge port discharges the game ball delivered from the delivery mechanism. The ball passage unit includes a first guiding part, a second guiding part, and a detection means. The first guiding unit guides the game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port. The second guiding unit can receive the game ball in the middle of the first guiding unit, and guides the received game ball to the discharge port while storing the received game ball. The detecting means can detect the flow state of the game ball in the second guiding portion. The sending mechanism causes the game ball to be sent out until the stagnation of the game ball is detected by the detection means. The first guiding part is formed with a first width in the lateral direction, the second guiding part is formed with a second width in the lateral direction, and merges with the first guiding part upstream from the discharge port, The discharge port is formed with a first width in the lateral direction.

  Thereby, even if the flow of the game ball in the first guide part leading from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port is stagnated, the game ball is received from the middle of the first guide part to the second guide part, and further the second guide part The game ball can be continuously sent out by the sending mechanism until the detection means detects the stagnation of the game ball. Therefore, even when the tank is full, the payout operation can be continued without being interrupted immediately, and a gaming machine capable of storing more game balls inside the payout means can be provided. In addition, by changing the lateral width of the first guide part and the second guide part, it becomes possible to change the amount of stored game balls and the flow rate in the first guide part and the second guide part, and more appropriate It is possible to adjust the payout operation.

(Appendix 22)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that has a storage tray for storing game balls and includes a detour that guides the game balls paid out from the payout means to a second area different from the first area of the storage dishes. It is disclosed (see JP-A-2006-87343). According to such a gaming machine, local stagnation of the game ball in the storage tray can be suppressed.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-87343, when a bypass route exposed to the outside is blocked by the player unconsciously placing his / her hand on the storage tray, the game ball guided to the bypass route is stagnant. As a result, there is a problem that ball clogging occurs immediately inside the payout means that continues to this detour. In addition, if there is a margin in the guide path inside the payout means so that ball clogging does not easily occur, there is a problem that the entire payout means becomes large.

  Therefore, the present invention solves such problems, can prevent the game balls from being blocked in the payout means as much as possible, and can reduce the size of the payout means as a whole. An object is to provide a gaming machine.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention has a delivery mechanism (for example, a ball delivery mechanism 720) capable of delivering a game ball, and a discharge port (for example, a discharge port 730B) that discharges the game ball sent from the delivery mechanism. A gaming machine provided with a payout means (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out a ball,
The payout means has a ball path unit (for example, a ball path unit 730) for guiding a game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port,
The ball passage unit is
A first guiding portion (for example, a first guiding path 730C) for guiding a game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port;
A second guiding portion (for example, a second guiding path 730D) that is provided so as to be able to receive a game ball in the middle of the first guiding portion and guides the received gaming ball to the discharge port while storing it;
The second guiding part is provided alongside the first guiding part.

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout means having a delivery mechanism, a discharge port, and a ball path unit. The payout means can pay out game balls. The delivery mechanism can deliver game balls. The discharge port discharges the game ball delivered from the delivery mechanism. The ball passage unit includes a first guiding portion and a second guiding portion. The first guiding unit guides the game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port. The second guiding unit can receive the game ball in the middle of the first guiding unit, and guides the received game ball to the discharge port while storing the received game ball. The second guiding part is provided alongside the first guiding part.

  Thereby, even if the flow of the game ball in the first guide part leading from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port is stagnated, the game ball is received by the second guide part in the middle of the first guide part, and the second guide part The game balls stored in can also be led to the discharge port. Further, the second guiding portion can be secured without greatly expanding the occupied space by being provided alongside the first guiding portion. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the ball of the game ball from being clogged as late as possible and can reduce the size of the entire payout unit together with the ball path unit.

(Appendix 23)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that has a storage tray for storing game balls and includes a detour that guides the game balls paid out from the payout means to a second area different from the first area of the storage dishes. It is disclosed (see JP-A-2006-87343). According to such a gaming machine, local stagnation of the game ball in the storage tray can be suppressed.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-87343, when a bypass route exposed to the outside is blocked by the player unconsciously placing his / her hand on the storage tray, the game ball guided to the bypass route is stagnant. As a result, there is a problem that ball clogging occurs immediately inside the payout means that continues to this detour.

  Accordingly, the present invention provides a gaming machine that solves such problems and can prevent a game ball from being jammed inside the payout means as much as possible while discharging the game ball from one place. The purpose is to provide.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention has a delivery mechanism (for example, a ball delivery mechanism 720) capable of delivering a game ball, and a discharge port (for example, a discharge port 730B) that discharges the game ball sent from the delivery mechanism. A gaming machine provided with a payout means (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out a ball,
The payout means has a ball path unit (for example, a ball path unit 730) for guiding a game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port,
The ball passage unit is
A first guiding portion (for example, a first guiding path 730C) for guiding a game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port;
A second guiding portion (for example, a second guiding path 730D) that is provided so as to be able to receive a game ball in the middle of the first guiding portion and guides the received gaming ball to join the discharge port while storing the received game ball; including.

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout means having a delivery mechanism, a discharge port, and a ball path unit. The payout means can pay out game balls. The delivery mechanism can deliver game balls. The discharge port discharges the game ball delivered from the delivery mechanism. The ball passage unit includes a first guiding portion and a second guiding portion. The first guiding unit guides the game ball from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port. The second guiding unit can receive the game ball in the middle of the first guiding unit, and guides the received game ball to the discharge port while storing the received game ball. The first guide portion and the second guide portion merge at the discharge port.

  Thereby, even if the flow of the game ball in the first guide part leading from the delivery mechanism to the discharge port is stagnated, the game ball is received by the second guide part in the middle of the first guide part, and the second guide part The game balls stored in can be guided to join the discharge port. Accordingly, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the ball of the game ball from being blocked inside the payout means as much as possible while discharging the game ball from one discharge port.

(Appendix 24)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been disclosed a gaming machine in which two passage holes are provided behind an out port of a game board and a guide surface is provided as a partition wall between the two passage holes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-62723). reference). According to such a gaming machine, the guide surface plays a role of partitioning the two passage holes, so that ball clogging in the vicinity of the out port is less likely to occur.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-62723, when a large number of out balls flow into the out port, a plurality of game balls are crowded at the same time due to the guiding surface as a barrier, so that the game balls are so-called bridges. As a result, there is still a problem that ball clogging still occurs.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can solve such problems and can effectively prevent clogging of a ball at a place where a plurality of gaming balls flow.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention has an inflow port (for example, an out port 55) through which a plurality of game balls can flow, and a plurality of detection means (for example, a first port) that can detect the inflowing game balls downstream from the inflow port. A detection sensor 840, a second detection sensor 850), and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A),
Downstream from the inflow port, one or a plurality of game balls are provided above the plurality of detection means so as to be playable, and have a space portion having an inclined bottom surface that rises in the direction in which the game balls flow (for example, Floating space portions 810D and 820D).

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an inflow port, a plurality of detection means, and a space portion. A plurality of game balls can flow into the inflow port. The plurality of detection means can detect a game ball that has flowed in downstream from the inflow port. The space portion is provided behind the plurality of detection means so that the game ball can move downstream from the inflow port, and has a sloped bottom surface that rises in the direction in which the game ball flows.

  As a result, the game ball can enter the space portion downstream from the inflow port, and the game ball in the space portion can be smoothly guided to the detection means along the bottom surface. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can effectively prevent clogging of a ball near the inflow port.

(Appendix 25)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been disclosed a gaming machine in which two passage holes are provided behind an out port of a game board and a guide surface is provided as a partition wall between the two passage holes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-62723). reference). According to such a gaming machine, the guide surface plays a role of partitioning the two passage holes, so that ball clogging in the vicinity of the out port is less likely to occur.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-62723, when a large number of out balls flow into the out port, a plurality of game balls are crowded at the same time due to the guiding surface as a barrier, so that the game balls are so-called bridges. As a result, there is still a problem that ball clogging still occurs.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can solve such problems and can effectively prevent clogging of a ball at a place where a plurality of gaming balls flow.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention has an inlet (for example, front opening 810A, 820A) through which a plurality of game balls can flow, and a plurality of detection means (for example, a game ball flowing in behind the inlet) (for example, A first detection sensor 840, a second detection sensor 850), and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A),
It is located between the plurality of detecting means, and is extended from the bottom of the inflow port so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride, and is formed in a wave shape along the direction in which the game ball flows in. Provided with a protruding portion (for example, a protruding piece member 830).

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an inflow port, a plurality of detection means, and a protrusion. A plurality of game balls can flow into the inflow port. The plurality of detection means can detect a game ball that has flowed in behind the inflow port. The protrusion is located between the plurality of detection means, and is extended from the bottom of the inflow port so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride, and is formed in a wave shape along the inflow direction of the game ball Is done.

  As a result, the game ball can be fluidly guided from the near side to the back along the direction in which the game ball flows in from the inflow port, so there is no possibility that the game balls bite into each other. A gaming machine capable of effectively preventing clogging can be provided.

(Appendix 26)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been disclosed a gaming machine in which two passage holes are provided behind an out port of a game board and a guide surface is provided as a partition wall between the two passage holes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-62723). reference). According to such a gaming machine, the guide surface plays a role of partitioning the two passage holes, so that ball clogging in the vicinity of the out port is less likely to occur.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-62723, when a large number of out balls flow into the out port, a plurality of game balls are crowded at the same time due to the guiding surface as a barrier, so that the game balls are so-called bridges. As a result, there is still a problem that ball clogging still occurs.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can solve such problems and can effectively prevent clogging of a ball at a place where a plurality of gaming balls flow.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention has an inlet (for example, front opening 810A, 820A) through which a plurality of game balls can flow, and a plurality of detection means (for example, a game ball flowing in behind the inlet) (for example, A first detection sensor 840, a second detection sensor 850), and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A),
An inclined shape that is located between the plurality of detection means, extends from the bottom of the inflow port so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride, and rises as the game ball flows in. The projection (for example, the protrusion piece member 830) which has the upper end (for example, upper end 830A) was provided.

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an inflow port, a plurality of detection means, and a protrusion. A plurality of game balls can flow into the inflow port. The plurality of detection means can detect a game ball that has flowed in behind the inflow port. The protrusion is located between the plurality of detection means, and is extended from the bottom of the inflow port so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride and rises as the game ball flows in. With an inclined upper end.

  Thus, a protrusion is provided so as to gradually separate the plurality of detection means from the front to the back along the direction in which the game ball flows from the inflow port, and any of the plurality of detection means is provided on the front side of the protrusion. Since the game ball can be guided and the game ball can be guided to one of the detection means on the back side of the protrusion, there is no risk of the ball biting between the game balls, and the ball clogging near the inflow port is prevented. A gaming machine that can be effectively prevented can be provided.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention is provided in the back in the inflow direction from the protrusion, and has a space portion (for example, a play space portion 810D) having an inclined bottom surface that rises as the game ball flows in the inflow direction. 820D).

  As a result, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the inner space while the protrusion separates the plurality of detection means, and the game ball in the space can be smoothly guided to the detection means along the bottom surface. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can effectively prevent clogging of a ball in the vicinity of an inflow port without causing a risk of ball biting between balls.

(Appendix 27)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been disclosed a gaming machine in which two passage holes are provided behind an out port of a game board and a guide surface is provided as a partition wall between the two passage holes (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-62723). reference). According to such a gaming machine, the guide surface plays a role of partitioning the two passage holes, so that ball clogging in the vicinity of the out port is less likely to occur.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-62723, when a large number of out balls flow into the out port, a plurality of game balls are crowded at the same time due to the guiding surface as a barrier, so that the game balls are so-called bridges. As a result, there is still a problem that ball clogging still occurs.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can solve such problems and can effectively prevent clogging of a ball at a place where a plurality of gaming balls flow.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention has an inlet (for example, front opening 810A, 820A) through which a plurality of game balls can flow, and a plurality of detection means (for example, a game ball flowing in behind the inlet) (for example, A first detection sensor 840, a second detection sensor 850), and a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A),
It is located between the plurality of detecting means, and is extended from the bottom of the inflow port so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride, and extends in a direction in which the game ball flows in. A protrusion (for example, a protruding piece member 830) having an upper end (for example, an upper end 830A) was provided.

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an inflow port, a plurality of detection means, and a protrusion. A plurality of game balls can flow into the inflow port. The plurality of detection means can detect a game ball that has flowed in behind the inflow port. The protrusion is located between the plurality of detection means and extends from the bottom of the inflow port so that at least a part of the inflowing game ball can ride, and extends along the direction in which the game ball flows in It has a ridged top.

  As a result, although the protrusion is provided so as to separate the plurality of detection means, the upper end of the protrusion is in a ridge shape, so there is no possibility of causing a ball engagement between the game balls, and in the vicinity of the inflow port. A gaming machine capable of effectively preventing a ball clogging can be provided.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention is provided in the back in the inflow direction from the protrusion, and has a space portion (for example, a play space portion 810D) having an inclined bottom surface that rises as the game ball flows in the inflow direction. 820D).

  As a result, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the inner space while the protrusion separates the plurality of detection means, and the game ball in the space can be smoothly guided to the detection means along the bottom surface. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can effectively prevent clogging of a ball in the vicinity of an inflow port without causing a risk of ball biting between balls.

(About Appendix 28)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a liquid crystal panel and a liquid crystal shutter, which are sequentially disposed between a front frame and one surface of a resin frame, and an outer frame disposed behind a fixed plate, the fixed plate and the outer frame include an outer frame. Display openings are provided to allow display objects arranged behind the LCD panel to be seen from the front side of the liquid crystal panel, and are provided on a circuit board support plate that is provided vertically on the back side of the peripheral part of the outer frame. A gaming machine provided with a circuit board is disclosed (see JP 2006-230859 A). According to such a gaming machine, by providing the circuit board support plate perpendicularly to the back side of the outer frame, it is possible to reduce the space for mounting the circuit board compared to the case where the circuit board is attached to the outer frame on the surface. Therefore, the entire display object (such as a picture) can be made visible without being restricted by the size of the circuit board.

  However, in the gaming machine of JP-A-2006-230859, the circuit board support plate protrudes from the back side of the outer frame, so it is easy to hit the circuit board support plate during assembly and transportation, When an external impact is applied to the circuit board support plate or the circuit board, a large force is applied to the joint between the outer frame and the circuit board support plate, which may cause damage.

  Therefore, the present invention aims to solve such problems and provide a gaming machine capable of protecting the board from external impacts while suppressing the board installation space on the back side of the game board. To do.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a gaming board (for example, gaming board 12A) having a gaming area (for example, gaming area 12a), and electrical components (for example, a first grand prize opening) provided on the back side of the gaming board. Solenoid 53b), a board (for example, game board relay board 101) to which the wiring part of the electric component is connected, and a cover member (for example, cover member 430) provided on the back side of the game board and covering the electric parts. ), And a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A),
The board is provided with a connector connecting portion (for example, a connector connecting portion 101a),
The board is erected at a substantially right angle with respect to the game board,
The cover member is provided with an opening (for example, an opening 432e) at a position corresponding to the substrate,
The substrate extends from the outside of the cover member through the opening to a position where a connection operation to the connector connecting portion can be performed, and at least an outer portion of the substrate is covered with the cover member.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a game board, an electrical component, a substrate, and a cover member. The game board includes a game area. The electrical parts are provided on the back side of the game board. The wiring part of the electrical component is connected to the substrate. A cover member is provided in the back side of a game board, and covers an electrical component.
The board is provided with a connector connecting portion and is erected at a substantially right angle with respect to the game board. The cover member has an opening at a position corresponding to the substrate. The substrate is extended from the outside of the cover member through the opening to a position where a connection operation with respect to the connector connecting portion can be performed, and at least an outer portion of the substrate is covered with the cover member.

  Thus, since the board is erected substantially perpendicular to the game board, the board installation space on the back side of the game board can be reduced as compared with the case where the board is attached to the game board. Further, by covering the electrical component with the cover member, it is possible to protect the connection portion between the electrical component and the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of protecting the board from external impacts while suppressing the board installation space on the back side of the game board.

  The cover member is provided with an opening at a position corresponding to the board, the board is extended from the outside of the cover member to a position where the connection operation to the connector connecting portion can be performed through the opening, and at least the outside of the board. The part was covered with a cover member. For this reason, it is possible to pull out the connector connected to the board to the outside of the cover member or to attach and detach the connector to the board with the cover member attached while protecting the board from external impacts. It is possible to improve the workability of machine assembly and maintenance.

(About Appendix 29)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a liquid crystal panel and a liquid crystal shutter, which are sequentially disposed between a front frame and one surface of a resin frame, and an outer frame disposed behind a fixed plate, the fixed plate and the outer frame include an outer frame. Display openings are provided to allow display objects arranged behind the LCD panel to be seen from the front side of the liquid crystal panel, and are provided on a circuit board support plate that is provided vertically on the back side of the peripheral part of the outer frame. A gaming machine provided with a circuit board is disclosed (see JP 2006-230859 A). According to such a gaming machine, by providing the circuit board support plate perpendicularly to the back side of the outer frame, it is possible to reduce the space for mounting the circuit board compared to the case where the circuit board is attached to the outer frame on the surface. Therefore, the entire display object (such as a picture) can be made visible without being restricted by the size of the circuit board.

  However, in the gaming machine of JP-A-2006-230859, the circuit board support plate protrudes from the back side of the outer frame, so it is easy to hit the circuit board support plate during assembly and transportation, When an external impact is applied to the circuit board support plate or the circuit board, a large force is applied to the joint between the outer frame and the circuit board support plate, which may cause damage.

  Therefore, the present invention aims to solve such problems and to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the risk of damage to the board while suppressing the installation space of the board on the back side of the game board. To do.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

  The gaming machine of the present invention includes a gaming board (for example, gaming board 12A) having a gaming area (for example, gaming area 12a), and electrical components (for example, a first grand prize opening) provided on the back side of the gaming board. A gaming machine including a solenoid 53b) and a board (for example, a game board relay board 101) to which a wiring portion of the electrical component is connected, the board standing substantially perpendicular to the game board. And can be folded so as to be parallel to the game board.

A gaming machine having such a configuration includes a gaming board, electrical components, and a board. The game board includes a game area. The electrical parts are provided on the back side of the game board. The wiring part of the electrical component is connected to the substrate.
The board can be erected substantially perpendicular to the game board and can be folded so as to be parallel to the game board.

  As a result, the board can be erected at a substantially right angle with respect to the game board, so that the board installation space on the back side of the game board can be reduced as compared with the case where the board is attached to the game board. In addition, the board can be folded so as to be parallel to the game board, so that the board can be folded as necessary (for example, when the game board with the board attached is transported or stored in a stacked manner). Since the board can be folded, the possibility that an external force is applied to the board is reduced and the risk of the board being damaged can be reduced as compared with the case where the board is left protruding vertically from the game board. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the risk of damaging the board while suppressing the board installation space on the back side of the game board.

In addition to the above configuration, the gaming machine of the present invention further includes a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) that is provided on the back side of the gaming board and covers the electrical component,
The board is provided with a connector connecting portion (for example, a connector connecting portion 101a),
The cover member is provided with an opening (for example, an opening 432e) at a position corresponding to the substrate,
The substrate is extended from the outside of the cover member through the opening to a position where the connection operation to the connector connecting portion can be performed, and at least an outer portion of the substrate is covered with the cover member. A wiring insertion port (for example, the wiring insertion port 101b) of the connector connecting portion is disposed so as to face the direction of the opening.

  Accordingly, the cover member is provided with an opening at a position corresponding to the board, the board extends from the outside of the cover member to a position where the connection operation to the connector connection portion can be performed through the opening, and at least the board In a state where the outer portion is covered with a cover member, the wiring connection port of the connector connecting portion is arranged so as to face the direction of the opening. For this reason, it is possible to pull out the connector connected to the board to the outside of the cover member or to attach and detach the connector to the board with the cover member attached while protecting the board from external impacts. It is possible to improve the workability of machine assembly and maintenance.

(Appendix 30)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a liquid crystal panel and a liquid crystal shutter, which are sequentially disposed between a front frame and one surface of a resin frame, and an outer frame disposed behind a fixed plate, the fixed plate and the outer frame include an outer frame. Display openings are provided to allow display objects arranged behind the LCD panel to be seen from the front side of the liquid crystal panel, and are provided on a circuit board support plate that is provided vertically on the back side of the peripheral part of the outer frame. A gaming machine provided with a circuit board is disclosed (see JP 2006-230859 A). According to such a gaming machine, by providing the circuit board support plate perpendicularly to the back side of the outer frame, it is possible to reduce the space for mounting the circuit board compared to the case where the circuit board is attached to the outer frame on the surface. Therefore, the entire display object (such as a picture) can be made visible without being restricted by the size of the circuit board.

  However, in the gaming machine of JP-A-2006-230859, the circuit board support plate protrudes from the back side of the outer frame, so it is easy to hit the circuit board support plate during assembly and transportation, When an external impact is applied to the circuit board support plate or the circuit board, a large force is applied to the joint between the outer frame and the circuit board support plate, which may cause damage.

  Therefore, the present invention aims to solve such problems and provide a gaming machine capable of protecting the board from external impacts while suppressing the board installation space on the back side of the game board. To do.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a gaming board (for example, gaming board 12A) having a gaming area (for example, gaming area 12a), and electrical components (for example, a first grand prize opening) provided on the back side of the gaming board. Solenoid 53b), a board (for example, game board relay board 101) provided with a wiring portion of the electrical component, an attachment base (eg, attachment base 420) provided on the back side of the game board, and the attachment A gaming machine provided on the back side of the base, capable of accommodating gaming machine components, and having a cover member (e.g., a cover member 430) covering the electrical parts,
The cover member can accommodate at least a part of the gaming machine components in a space formed by a back surface portion (for example, the back surface portion 431) and at least two side surface portions (for example, the side surface portion 432). ,
The width of the back portion is formed narrower than the width of the mounting base,
The side surface portion includes an attachment portion (for example, an attachment portion 433) that can be attached to the attachment base on an end portion side that is not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one of the side surface portions is provided with the attachment portion. Formed so as to incline from the end to the end adjacent to the back surface,
The board is erected at a substantially right angle with respect to the game board,
The inclined side surface portion includes a housing portion that can accommodate the gaming machine components, and an opening (for example, an opening portion 432e) is provided at a position corresponding to the board.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a game board, an electrical component, a board, a mounting base, and a cover member. The game board includes a game area. The electrical parts are provided on the back side of the game board. The board is provided with a wiring portion for electrical components. The mounting base is provided on the back side of the game board. The cover member is provided on the back side of the mounting base, can accommodate gaming machine components, and covers the electrical components. The cover member can accommodate at least a part of the gaming machine components in the space formed by the back surface portion and the at least two side surface portions. The width of the back surface portion is formed narrower than the width of the mounting base. The side surface portion includes an attachment portion that can be attached to the attachment base on the end portion side not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one side surface portion is inclined from the end portion where the attachment portion is provided to the end portion adjacent to the back surface portion. It is formed to do.
The board is erected substantially perpendicular to the game board. The inclined side surface portion includes a housing portion that can accommodate the component parts, and an opening is provided at a position corresponding to the substrate.

  Accordingly, since the board is erected substantially at right angles to the game board, the board installation space on the back side of the game board can be reduced as compared with the case where the board is attached to the game board. Further, by covering the electrical component with the cover member, it is possible to protect the connection portion between the electrical component and the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of protecting the board from external impacts while suppressing the board installation space on the back side of the game board.

  In addition, since at least one of the side surfaces of the cover member is inclined, the area where the gaming machine components can be installed becomes larger when the depth dimension is the same than when the side surface portion is not inclined. It is possible to attach machine components. In addition, since the gaming machine component parts can be accommodated in the inclined side surface part, the gaming machine component parts are prevented from projecting to the back side of the gaming machine as compared with the case where the game machine component parts are concentrated on the back surface part. It becomes possible. In addition, by providing an opening at a position corresponding to the board in the inclined side part, it is possible to reduce the installation space of the gaming machine components on the side part of the cover member while suppressing the board installation space on the back side of the game board. It becomes possible to enlarge.

(Appendix 31)
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a liquid crystal panel and a liquid crystal shutter, which are sequentially disposed between a front frame and one surface of a resin frame, and an outer frame disposed behind a fixed plate, the fixed plate and the outer frame include an outer frame. Display openings are provided to allow display objects arranged behind the LCD panel to be seen from the front side of the liquid crystal panel, and are provided on a circuit board support plate that is provided vertically on the back side of the peripheral part of the outer frame. A gaming machine provided with a circuit board is disclosed (see JP 2006-230859 A). According to such a gaming machine, by providing the circuit board support plate perpendicularly to the back side of the outer frame, it is possible to reduce the space for mounting the circuit board compared to the case where the circuit board is attached to the outer frame on the surface. Therefore, the entire display object (such as a picture) can be made visible without being restricted by the size of the circuit board.

  However, in the gaming machine of JP-A-2006-230859, the circuit board support plate protrudes from the back side of the outer frame, so it is easy to hit the circuit board support plate during assembly and transportation, When an external impact is applied to the circuit board support plate or the circuit board, a large force is applied to the joint between the outer frame and the circuit board support plate, which may cause damage.

  Therefore, the present invention aims to solve such problems and provide a gaming machine capable of protecting the board from external impacts while suppressing the board installation space on the back side of the game board. To do.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a gaming board (for example, gaming board 12A) having a gaming area (for example, gaming area 12a), and electrical components (for example, a first grand prize opening) provided on the back side of the gaming board. Solenoid 53b), a board (for example, game board relay board 101) to which the wiring portion of the electrical component is connected, an attachment base (eg, attachment base 420) provided on the back side of the game board, and the attachment A cover member (for example, a cover member 430) provided on the back side of the base and covering the electrical component,
The board is erected at a substantially right angle with respect to the game board,
On the outer surface of the cover member, a specific accommodation portion (for example, a side surface) that can accommodate a specific gaming machine component (for example, the relay substrate 100) connected to the substrate through an opening (for example, the opening portion 432e). A general accommodating portion (for example, a first recessed portion 432a) and at least two accommodating portions each capable of accommodating a plurality of other types of gaming machine components (for example, the main control board 70A and the sub control board 80A). A second side recess 432c and a recess 431a),
The board is provided with a game board connector connection portion (for example, a connector connection portion 101a),
The specific gaming machine component includes a specific component connector connection portion (for example, a relay board connector connection portion 100a),
The plurality of types of gaming machine components each include a general component connector connection part (for example, a main control board connector connection part 70Aa, a sub control board connector connection part 80Aa),
Each of the general accommodating portions is adjacent to the specific accommodating portion,
In the specific accommodation portion, the opening is provided at a position corresponding to the substrate,
The board extends from the outside of the cover member through the opening to a position where a connection operation to the game board connector connecting portion can be performed, and at least an outer portion of the board is covered with the cover member. ,
The game board connector connection portion and the specific component connector connection portion are connected by a wiring member,
The specific component connector connection portion and the general component connector connection portion are connected by a wiring member.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a game board, an electrical component, a board, a mounting base, and a cover member. The game board includes a game area. The electrical parts are provided on the back side of the game board. The board is connected to the wiring part of the electrical component. The mounting base is provided on the back side of the game board. The cover member is provided on the back side of the mounting base and covers the electrical component. The board is erected substantially perpendicular to the game board.
The outer surface of the cover member has at least two specific accommodation units that can accommodate specific gaming machine components connected to the board through the opening, and at least two other types of gaming machine components. And a general storage unit composed of two or more storage units. The board is provided with a game board connector connecting portion. The specific gaming machine component includes a specific component connector connection portion. The plurality of types of gaming machine components each include a general component connector connection portion. Each of the general storage units is adjacent to the specific storage unit. The specific accommodation part is provided with an opening at a position corresponding to the substrate. The board extends from the outside of the cover member through the opening to a position where a connection operation to the game board connector connection portion can be performed, and at least an outer portion of the board is covered with the cover member. The game board connector connecting portion and the specific component connector connecting portion are connected by a wiring member, and the specific component connector connecting portion and the general component connector connecting portion are connected by a wiring member.

  Thus, since the board is erected substantially perpendicular to the game board, the board installation space on the back side of the game board can be reduced as compared with the case where the board is attached to the game board. Further, by covering the electrical component with the cover member, it is possible to protect the connection portion between the electrical component and the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of protecting the board from external impacts while suppressing the board installation space on the back side of the game board.

  In addition, a general accommodation unit composed of a plurality of accommodation units each capable of accommodating other gaming machine component parts is disposed adjacent to a specific accommodation unit capable of accommodating a specific gaming machine component part, and the specific accommodation part Since an opening that can be connected to the wiring from the game board is provided, the wiring length between the parts provided on the game board and each of the plurality of game machine components housed in the general housing portion can be shortened. . Therefore, it is easy to check various game machine components and route cables.

(Appendix 32)
Conventionally, in the pachinko machine 1, a main body frame having a back cover fastening hole, and a rear side of the game board holding port of the main body frame can be closed, and a through insertion hole corresponding to the back cover fastening hole and the vicinity of the insertion hole There is disclosed a gaming machine having a back cover having a locking hole formed on the inside and a male screw part that can be fastened to a back cover fastening hole of a main body frame through an insertion hole of the back cover (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-2011). 167306). According to such a gaming machine, the back cover can be fastened to the main body frame by the male screw portion.

  However, the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-167306 strictly adjusts the position of the back cover with respect to the main body frame and strictly connects the back cover insertion hole and the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame so that the male screw portion passes. It is necessary to adjust to. However, when the back cover is overlapped with the main body frame, the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame cannot be visually recognized, and it is difficult to align the back cover at the mounting position of the main body frame, and there is a problem that the efficiency of the assembly work is lowered.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can solve such problems and improve the assembly work efficiency.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a mounting frame (for example, the mounting frame 410) disposed on the front surface side, and a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) mounted on the back surface side of the mounting frame. (For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A)
The mounting frame is
A storage tank (for example, storage tank 415) capable of storing game balls;
A first guide rod (e.g., first guide rod 416) for guiding the game ball downstream from the storage tank,
The cover member is
A payout device (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out game balls is attached,
A second guide rod (for example, a second guide rod 434) for guiding the game ball to the payout device;
When the cover member is mounted on the mounting frame, the first guide rod and the second guide rod are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening, thereby allowing the game ball to flow down. It becomes a state,
Either one of the first guide rod and the second guide rod is provided with a receiving portion (for example, a receiving portion 434a) formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening portion,
The receiving portion includes connection position guide means (for example, a rib 434b) that guides an opening inserted into the receiving portion to a connection position.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an attachment frame and a cover member. The mounting frame is disposed on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the attachment frame. The mounting frame includes a storage tank and a first guide rod. The storage tank can store game balls. The first guide rod guides the game ball downstream from the storage tank. The cover member includes a dispensing device and a second guide rod. The payout device can pay out game balls.
The second guide rod guides the game ball to the payout device.
When the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the first guide rod and the second guide rod are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. It becomes. One of the first guide rod and the second guide rod is provided with a receiving portion formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening. The receiving unit includes connection position guide means for guiding the opening inserted into the receiving unit to the connection position.

  Thereby, in the assembly operation of the gaming machine, when the cover member is attached to the attachment frame, the other opening of the first guide rod of the attachment frame and the second guide rod of the cover member is overlapped by aligning the rough positions. The part is guided to the connection position guide means of the receiving part of one opening, and is connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening, so that the game ball can flow down. In this way, it is only necessary to align the approximate positions of the first guide rod of the mounting frame and the second guide rod of the cover member and the other opening, and to overlap them, without strictly aligning them. Since the other opening is connected to the one opening so that the game ball can flow down, the assembly work efficiency can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the assembly work efficiency.

(About Appendix 33)
Conventionally, in the pachinko machine 1, a main body frame having a back cover fastening hole, and a rear side of the game board holding port of the main body frame can be closed, and a through insertion hole corresponding to the back cover fastening hole and the vicinity of the insertion hole There is disclosed a gaming machine having a back cover having a locking hole formed on the inside and a male screw part that can be fastened to a back cover fastening hole of a main body frame through an insertion hole of the back cover (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-2011). 167306). According to such a gaming machine, the back cover can be fastened to the main body frame by the male screw portion.

  However, the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-167306 strictly adjusts the position of the back cover with respect to the main body frame and strictly connects the back cover insertion hole and the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame so that the male screw portion passes. It is necessary to adjust to. However, when the back cover is overlapped with the main body frame, the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame cannot be visually recognized, and it is difficult to align the back cover at the mounting position of the main body frame, and there is a problem that the efficiency of the assembly work is lowered.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can solve such problems and improve the assembly work efficiency.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a mounting frame (for example, the mounting frame 410) disposed on the front surface side, and a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) mounted on the back surface side of the mounting frame. (For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A)
The mounting frame is
A storage tank (for example, storage tank 415) capable of storing game balls;
A first guide rod (for example, a first guide rod 416) for guiding the game ball downstream from the storage tank;
A payout exit (for example, payout exit 417) from which game balls can be paid out;
A third guide rod (for example, a third guide rod 418) for guiding the game ball to the payout opening,
The cover member is
A payout device (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out game balls;
A second guide rod (for example, a second guide rod 434) for guiding the game ball to the payout device;
A fourth guide rod (for example, a discharge port 730B) for guiding the game ball downstream from the payout device,
When the cover member is mounted on the mounting frame, the first guide rod and the second guide rod are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening, thereby allowing the game ball to flow down. It becomes a state,
When the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the third guide rod and the fourth guide rod are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening, thereby allowing the game ball to flow down. It becomes a state,
Either one of the first guide rod and the second guide rod is provided with a receiving portion (for example, a receiving portion 434a) formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening portion,
One of the third guide rod and the fourth guide rod is provided with the receiving portion (for example, receiving portion 418a),
The receiving portion includes connection position guide means (for example, a rib 434b) that guides an opening inserted into the receiving portion to a connection position.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an attachment frame and a cover member. The mounting frame is disposed on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the attachment frame. The mounting frame includes a storage tank, a first guide rod, a payout port, and a third guide rod. The storage tank can store game balls. The first guide rod guides the game ball downstream from the storage tank. The game balls are paid out at the payout exit. The third guide rod guides the game ball to the payout exit. The cover member includes a payout device, a second guide rod, and a fourth guide rod. The payout device can pay out game balls. The second guide rod guides the game ball to the payout device. The fourth guide rod guides the game ball downstream from the payout device.
When the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the first guide rod and the second guide rod are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. It becomes. When the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the third guide rod and the fourth guide rod are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down It becomes. One of the first guide rod and the second guide rod is provided with a receiving portion formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening. A receiving portion is provided on one of the third guide rod and the fourth guide rod. The receiving unit includes connection position guide means for guiding the opening inserted into the receiving unit to the connection position.

  Thereby, in the assembly operation of the gaming machine, when the cover member is attached to the attachment frame, the other opening of the first guide rod of the attachment frame and the second guide rod of the cover member is overlapped by aligning the rough positions. The part is guided to the connection position guide means of the receiving part of one opening, and the other opening is connected so as to be inserted into the one opening so that the game ball can flow down. In addition, the opening of one of the third guide rod of the mounting frame and the fourth guide rod of the cover member is guided to the connection position guide means of the receiving portion of the one opening, and the other opening is the one opening. By connecting so as to be inserted into the part, the game ball can flow down. As described above, any one of the opening and the other opening of the first guide rod of the mounting frame and the second guide rod of the cover member, and any of the third guide rod of the mounting frame and the fourth guide rod of the cover member. Even if one opening and the other opening are not precisely aligned, the rough position is aligned and the two openings are connected to each other so that the other opening is inserted into one opening. Since it is possible to flow down, the assembly work efficiency can be improved. Furthermore, since the positioning at the time of attaching the cover member to the mounting frame is possible at the two connecting portions of the first guide rod and the second guide rod and the third guide rod and the fourth guide rod, it is possible to roughly By aligning the positions, more accurate positioning is possible. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the assembly work efficiency.

(Appendix 34)
Conventionally, in the pachinko machine 1, a main body frame having a back cover fastening hole, and a rear side of the game board holding port of the main body frame can be closed, and a through insertion hole corresponding to the back cover fastening hole and the vicinity of the insertion hole There is disclosed a gaming machine having a back cover having a locking hole formed on the inside and a male screw part that can be fastened to a back cover fastening hole of a main body frame through an insertion hole of the back cover (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-2011). 167306). According to such a gaming machine, the back cover can be fastened to the main body frame by the male screw portion.

  However, the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-167306 strictly adjusts the position of the back cover with respect to the main body frame and strictly connects the back cover insertion hole and the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame so that the male screw portion passes. It is necessary to adjust to. However, when the back cover is overlapped with the main body frame, the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame cannot be visually recognized, and it is difficult to align the back cover at the mounting position of the main body frame, and there is a problem that the efficiency of the assembly work is lowered.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can solve such problems and improve the assembly work efficiency.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a mounting frame (for example, the mounting frame 410) disposed on the front surface side, and a cover member (for example, a cover member 430) mounted on the back surface side of the mounting frame. (For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A)
The mounting frame includes a first guide rod (for example, a first guide rod 416) that guides the game ball downstream,
The cover member includes a second guide rod (for example, a second guide rod 434) for guiding the game ball,
When the cover member is mounted on the mounting frame, the first guide rod and the second guide rod are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening, thereby allowing the game ball to flow down. It becomes a state,
Either one of the first guide rod and the second guide rod is provided with a receiving portion (for example, a receiving portion 434a) formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening portion,
The receiving part is
A connection position guide means (for example, a rib 434b) for guiding the opening inserted into the receiving portion to a connection position;
The shape of the portion surrounded by the inner edge of the connection position guide means is substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the other opening,
The connection position guide means is inclined downward from the outer edge toward the inner edge.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an attachment frame and a cover member. The mounting frame is disposed on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the attachment frame. The mounting frame includes a first guide rod. The first guide rod guides the game ball downstream. The cover member includes a second guide rod. The second guide rod guides the game ball to the payout device.
When the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the first guide rod and the second guide rod are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. It becomes. One of the first guide rod and the second guide rod is provided with a receiving portion formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening. The receiving portion includes connection position guiding means for guiding the opening inserted into the receiving portion to the connection position, and the shape of the portion surrounded by the inner edge of the connection position guiding means is substantially the same as the outer shape of the other opening. Shape. The connection position guide means is inclined downward from the outer edge toward the inner edge.

  Thereby, in the assembly operation of the gaming machine, when the cover member is attached to the attachment frame, the rough positions are overlapped and overlapped. At this time, even if the positions of the openings are slightly shifted, the other opening is led to the inclination of the connection position guide means of one opening by pushing the cover member, and the outer edge of the connection position guide means It moves from the inner edge side to the inner edge side, fits into a portion surrounded by the inner edge, is connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening, and the game ball is allowed to flow down. In this way, it is only necessary to align the approximate positions of the first guide rod of the mounting frame and the second guide rod of the cover member and the other opening, and to overlap them, without strictly aligning them. Since the other opening is connected to the one opening so that the game ball can flow down, the assembly work efficiency can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the assembly work efficiency.

(About Appendix 35)
Conventionally, in the pachinko machine 1, a main body frame having a back cover fastening hole, and a rear side of the game board holding port of the main body frame can be closed, and a through insertion hole corresponding to the back cover fastening hole and the vicinity of the insertion hole There is disclosed a gaming machine having a back cover having a locking hole formed on the inside and a male screw part that can be fastened to a back cover fastening hole of a main body frame through an insertion hole of the back cover (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-2011). 167306). According to such a gaming machine, the back cover can be fastened to the main body frame by the male screw portion.

  However, the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-167306 strictly adjusts the position of the back cover with respect to the main body frame and strictly connects the back cover insertion hole and the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame so that the male screw portion passes. It is necessary to adjust to. However, when the back cover is overlapped with the main body frame, the back cover fastening hole of the main body frame cannot be visually recognized, and it is difficult to align the back cover at the mounting position of the main body frame, and there is a problem that the efficiency of the assembly work is lowered.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can solve such problems and improve the assembly work efficiency.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (including a mounting frame (for example, the mounting frame 410) disposed on the front side and a cover member (for example, the cover member 430) mounted on the back side of the mounting frame ( For example, a pachinko machine 1A)
The mounting frame includes a first guide rod (for example, a first guide rod 416) that guides the game ball downstream,
The cover member includes a second guide rod (for example, a second guide rod 434) for guiding the game ball,
When the cover member is mounted on the mounting frame, the first guide rod and the second guide rod are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening, thereby allowing the game ball to flow down. It becomes a state,
Either one of the first guide rod and the second guide rod is provided with a receiving portion (for example, a receiving portion 434a) formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening portion,
The receiving portion includes connection position guide means (for example, a rib 434b) for guiding an opening inserted into the receiving portion to a connection position.
The other one of the first guide rod and the second guide rod is formed on the outer edge of the opening and has an outer shape substantially the same shape as the shape surrounded by the connection position guide means, and the connection position And an engaging means (for example, engaging portion 416a) for engaging with the connection position guiding means.

The gaming machine having such a configuration includes an attachment frame and a cover member. The mounting frame is disposed on the front side. The cover member is attached to the back side of the attachment frame. The mounting frame includes a first guide rod. The first guide rod guides the game ball downstream. The cover member includes a second guide rod. The second guide rod guides the game ball to the payout device.
When the cover member is attached to the mounting frame, the first guide rod and the second guide rod are connected so that the other opening is inserted into one opening so that the game ball can flow down. It becomes. One of the first guide rod and the second guide rod is provided with a receiving portion formed with an opening area wider than the opening area of the other opening. The receiving unit includes connection position guide means for guiding the opening inserted into the receiving unit to the connection position. One of the first guide rod and the second guide rod is formed on the outer edge of the opening and has an outer shape substantially the same shape as the portion surrounded by the connection position guide means. Engaging means for engaging with the guiding means is provided.

  Thereby, in the assembly operation of the gaming machine, when the cover member is attached to the attachment frame, the other opening of the first guide rod of the attachment frame and the second guide rod of the cover member is overlapped by aligning the rough positions. The engagement means of the part is guided to the connection position guide means of the receiving part of one opening, and is fitted into a part surrounded by the connection position guide means at the connection position, and the other opening is in one opening. By being connected so as to be inserted, the game ball can flow down. In this way, it is only necessary to align the approximate positions of the first guide rod of the mounting frame and the second guide rod of the cover member and the other opening, and to overlap them, without strictly aligning them. Since the other opening is connected to the one opening so that the game ball can flow down, the assembly work efficiency can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the assembly work efficiency.

  When the other opening is guided by the connection position guiding means of one opening, the outer edge of the opening of the other opening abuts the connection position guiding means. At this time, a force is applied to the outer edge of the opening. In addition, the opening may be deformed, and there is a risk that the flow of the game ball will be hindered after connection. According to the present invention, by providing the engaging means on the outer edge of the opening of the other opening, the engaging means is brought into contact with the connection position guide means, and the force applied to the outer edge of the opening is reduced. It becomes possible to prevent the hindrance of the ball flow.

(About Appendix 36)
Conventionally, there has been disclosed a gaming machine in which game balls stored in an upper plate (storage plate) are arranged in a line on a straight rectifying rod and the gaming balls guided by the rectifying rod are guided to a launching device (special feature). (See Kaikai 2003-340085). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the clogging of game balls that are guided from the storage tray to the launching device.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340085, when the ball discharge outlet is open in the storage tray, the game ball released from the ball payout outlet becomes a discharge outlet before reaching the rectifier bowl. There is a problem that the game ball is not supplied to the launching device because it enters and is discharged to the outside.

  Therefore, the present invention solves such a problem, and allows the game ball released from the payout port to smoothly fall and discharge to a predetermined location even when the ball outlet is open in the storage tray. It is an object to provide a gaming machine that can be guided without any problems.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a payout device (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out game balls, a storage tray (eg, a plate unit 900) capable of storing game balls paid out from the payout device, A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) provided with a discharge port (for example, a dispensing outlet 901) that discharges the game ball paid out from the dispensing device to the storage tray;
The storage tray has an outer wall (for example, outer wall portion 930Ea) disposed at a position at least partially facing the discharge port, and can store a game ball released from the discharge port (for example, Storage unit 930E), an alignment unit (for example, alignment unit 920A) for aligning a plurality of game balls in a row so as to advance, and a rectification unit (for example, rectification unit) for guiding game balls from the storage unit to the alignment unit 930C), and
The alignment portion is formed such that the upstream side in the alignment direction is separated from the discharge port,
The rectifying part has a peripheral wall part (for example, an outer peripheral part 930B) formed in a curved shape so as to guide the game balls released from the discharge port to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment part,
The storage tray has an opening (for example, a first opening 930F) that can discharge the stored game balls to the outside of the storage tray.
The opening is provided with a lid (for example, a first opening / closing lid 953A) that can be switched between a closed state in which the game balls can be stored and an open state in which the game balls can be discharged to the outside.
The outer wall and the peripheral wall portion form a continuous surface that can roll while the game ball released from the discharge port is in contact with it,
The opening is directed from the continuous surface toward the inside of the storage tray so that a rolling game ball that is in contact with the continuous surface does not fall into the opening when the lid is in an open state. Are arranged at predetermined intervals.

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout device, a storage tray, and a discharge port. The payout device can pay out game balls. The storage tray can store game balls paid out from the payout device. The discharge port discharges the game ball paid out from the payout device to the storage tray. The storage dish has a storage part, an alignment part, and a rectification part. The storage part has an outer wall arranged at a position at least partially facing the discharge port, and can store a game ball released from the discharge port. The alignment portion is formed such that a plurality of game balls are aligned in a row so as to be able to travel, and the upstream side in the alignment direction is separated from the discharge port. The rectifying unit has a peripheral wall portion formed in a curved shape so as to guide the game ball released from the discharge port to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment unit in order to guide the game ball to the alignment unit. Further, the storage tray has an opening that can discharge the stored game balls to the outside of the storage tray. The opening is provided with a lid that can be switched between a closed state in which the game balls can be stored and an open state in which the game balls can be discharged to the outside. And an outer wall and a surrounding wall part form the continuous surface which can roll, with the game ball discharge | released from the discharge port contacting. When the lid is in the open state, the opening is spaced from the continuous surface toward the inside of the storage tray so that the game balls rolling while contacting the continuous surface do not fall into the opening. Are arranged.

  As a result, the game balls released from the discharge port in the storage tray roll along the outer wall in contact with the outer wall, and further roll along the continuous curved peripheral wall portion, upstream of the alignment portion in the alignment direction. In the alignment portion, the game balls are guided in a line from the upstream side in the alignment direction to the downstream side in the alignment direction. At that time, even if the lid provided at the opening is in an open state, the game balls released from the discharge port roll from the outer wall along the peripheral wall without falling into the opening, and are aligned from the rectifying unit. Led to the department. Therefore, the outer wall of the storage part and the peripheral wall part of the alignment part are separated from the opening part by a predetermined distance so as not to fall from the opening part while ensuring a relatively long path length from the discharge port to the alignment part through the rectifying part. Since the peripheral wall portion is formed in a curved shape, the game ball can be guided without being smoothly dropped and discharged from the rectifying portion to the alignment portion.

(About Appendix 37)
Conventionally, there has been disclosed a gaming machine in which game balls stored in an upper plate (storage plate) are arranged in a line on a straight rectifying rod and the gaming balls guided by the rectifying rod are guided to a launching device (special feature). (See Kaikai 2003-340085). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the clogging of game balls that are guided from the storage tray to the launching device.

  However, in the gaming machine of the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340085, it is necessary to secure a certain length of the rectifying basket and align the game balls in a row as long as possible. There was a problem of occupying a wide installation space in front of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, the present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine that solves such problems and can prevent the clogging of game balls while suppressing the width dimension and installation space of the storage tray.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a payout device (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out game balls, a storage tray (eg, a plate unit 900) capable of storing game balls paid out from the payout device, A game machine including a discharge port (for example, a payout port 901) for discharging a game ball paid out from a payout device to the storage tray;
The storage tray includes an alignment unit (for example, an alignment unit 920A) that aligns a plurality of game balls in a row so that the game balls can travel, and a rectification unit (for example, a rectification unit 930C) that guides the game balls to the alignment unit. Have
The alignment portion is formed in a groove shape so as to linearly align a plurality of game balls,
The rectifying unit is formed to guide the game balls released from the discharge port to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment unit while detouring, and is aligned with the alignment unit on the rectifying unit side of the alignment unit. A wall portion (for example, a wall portion 920Ac) that prevents the game ball released from the discharge port from riding on the game ball is provided.

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout device, a storage tray, and a discharge port. The payout device can pay out game balls. The storage tray can store game balls paid out from the payout device. The discharge port discharges the game ball paid out from the payout device to the storage tray. The storage dish has an alignment part and a rectification part. The alignment portion is formed in a groove shape so that the plurality of game balls are aligned in a row so that the plurality of game balls can advance, and the plurality of game balls are linearly aligned. The rectifying unit is formed so as to guide the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment unit while detouring the game ball to guide the game ball to the alignment unit. On the rectifying unit side of the aligning portion, a wall portion is provided for preventing the game balls released from the discharge port from riding on the aligned game balls.

  Thereby, the game ball released from the discharge port in the storage dish is guided to detour to the rectification unit, and then guided from the rectification unit to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment unit. A plurality of game balls are guided in a state of being aligned straight along the groove. Therefore, the alignment portion is formed in a straight groove shape while ensuring a relatively long path length from the discharge port to the alignment portion through the rectifying portion, so that the width and the installation space of the storage tray are suppressed. In addition, the game balls can be guided from the rectifying unit to the aligning unit without causing the balls to be smoothly blocked. In addition, it is possible to prevent the released game balls from riding on the game balls aligned in the alignment section, causing the alignment to be disturbed and causing the balls to become clogged, or to prevent the game balls from jumping out of the storage tray.

(About Appendix 38)
Conventionally, there has been disclosed a gaming machine in which game balls stored in an upper plate (storage plate) are arranged in a line on a straight rectifying rod and the gaming balls guided by the rectifying rod are guided to a launching device (special feature). (See Kaikai 2003-340085). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the clogging of game balls that are guided from the storage tray to the launching device.

  However, in the gaming machine of the above-mentioned Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340085, it is necessary to secure a certain length of the rectifying basket and align the game balls in a row as long as possible. There was a problem of occupying a wide installation space in front of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, the present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine that solves such problems and can prevent the clogging of game balls while suppressing the width dimension and installation space of the storage tray.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a payout device (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out game balls, a storage tray (eg, a plate unit 900) capable of storing game balls paid out from the payout device, A game machine including a discharge port (for example, a payout port 901) for discharging a game ball paid out from a payout device to the storage tray;
The storage tray includes an alignment unit (for example, an alignment unit 920A) that aligns a plurality of game balls in a row so as to advance, a rectification unit (for example, a rectification unit 930C) that guides the game balls to the alignment unit, A cover (for example, a cover portion 930A of the saucer cover member 930) having an opening (for example, an opening 930Ab) into which a game ball can be introduced,
The alignment portion is covered by the cover, and is provided so that the upstream side in the alignment direction is close to the opening,
The rectifying unit is formed to guide the game ball released from the discharge port to the opening while guiding the game ball along the outer periphery of the cover.

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout device, a storage tray, and a discharge port. The payout device can pay out game balls. The storage tray can store game balls paid out from the payout device. The discharge port discharges the game ball paid out from the payout device to the storage tray. The storage tray includes an alignment unit, a rectification unit, and a cover. The cover has an opening through which a game ball can be introduced. The alignment portion is arranged so that the plurality of game balls are aligned in a row so as to advance, and the upstream side in the alignment direction is close to the opening while being covered by the cover. The rectifying unit is formed so as to guide the game ball released from the discharge port to the opening while guiding the game ball along the outer periphery of the cover in order to guide the game ball to the alignment unit.

  Thereby, the game ball released from the discharge port in the storage tray is guided to the rectifying unit along the outer periphery of the cover, and then enters the opening of the cover from the rectifying unit and is guided upstream in the alignment direction of the alignment unit. In the alignment unit, a plurality of game balls are aligned and guided in a row. Therefore, by forming the flow straightening portion and the alignment portion on the outside and inside of the cover, it is possible to secure a relatively long path length from the discharge port to the alignment portion through the flow straightening portion. The space can be reduced and the game ball can be guided from the rectifying unit to the aligning unit without smoothly clogging the ball.

(Appendix 39)
Conventionally, there has been disclosed a gaming machine in which game balls stored in an upper plate (storage plate) are arranged in a line on a straight rectifying rod and the gaming balls guided by the rectifying rod are guided to a launching device (special feature). (See Kaikai 2003-340085). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the clogging of game balls that are guided from the storage tray to the launching device.

  However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-340085, when the ball discharge outlet is open in the storage tray, the game ball released from the ball payout outlet becomes a discharge outlet before reaching the rectifier bowl. There is a problem that the game ball is not supplied to the launching device because it enters and is discharged to the outside.

  Therefore, the present invention solves such a problem, and allows the game ball released from the payout port to smoothly fall and discharge to a predetermined location even when the ball outlet is open in the storage tray. It is an object to provide a gaming machine that can be guided without any problems.

  The present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine of the present invention includes a payout device (for example, a payout device 700) capable of paying out game balls, a storage tray (eg, a plate unit 900) capable of storing game balls paid out from the payout device, A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1A) provided with a discharge port (for example, a dispensing outlet 901) that discharges the game ball paid out from the dispensing device to the storage tray;
The storage tray has an outer wall (for example, outer wall portion 930Ea) disposed at a position at least partially facing the discharge port, and can store a game ball released from the discharge port (for example, Storage unit 930E), an alignment unit (for example, alignment unit 920A) for aligning a plurality of game balls in a row so as to advance, and a rectification unit (for example, rectification unit) for guiding game balls from the storage unit to the alignment unit 930C) and a curved peripheral wall portion (for example, outer peripheral portion 930B),
The storage tray has an opening (for example, a first opening 930F) that can discharge the stored game balls to the outside of the storage tray.
The opening is provided with a lid (for example, a first opening / closing lid 953A) that can be switched between a closed state in which the game balls can be stored and an open state in which the game balls can be discharged to the outside.
The outer wall and the peripheral wall portion form a continuous surface that can roll while the game ball released from the discharge port is in contact with it,
The opening portion has a predetermined distance from the continuous surface toward the inside of the storage tray so that a game ball rolling while contacting the continuous surface does not fall on the bottom surface of the storage tray. Arranged with a gap
The alignment portion is provided on the inner side of the peripheral wall portion while the upstream side in the alignment direction is close to the peripheral wall portion.
The rectifying unit is formed to guide the game ball released from the discharge port to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment unit while guiding the game ball along the peripheral wall portion.

  The gaming machine having such a configuration includes a payout device, a storage tray, and a discharge port. The payout device can pay out game balls. The storage tray can store game balls paid out from the payout device. The discharge port discharges the game ball paid out from the payout device to the storage tray. The storage dish has a storage part, an alignment part, a rectification part, and a peripheral wall part. The peripheral wall portion is formed in a curved shape. The storage part has an outer wall arranged at a position at least partially facing the discharge port, and can store a game ball released from the discharge port. The alignment portion aligns the plurality of game balls in a row so that they can travel, and is provided on the inner side of the peripheral wall portion while the upstream side in the alignment direction is close to the peripheral wall portion. The rectifying unit is formed so as to guide the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the upstream side in the alignment direction of the alignment unit while guiding the game ball released from the discharge port along the peripheral wall unit in order to guide the game ball to the alignment unit. Further, the storage tray has an opening that can discharge the stored game balls to the outside of the storage tray. The opening is provided with a lid that can be switched between a closed state in which the game balls can be stored and an open state in which the game balls can be discharged to the outside. And an outer wall and a surrounding wall part form the continuous surface which can roll, with the game ball discharge | released from the discharge port contacting. When the lid is in the open state, the opening is spaced from the continuous surface toward the inside of the storage tray so that the game balls rolling while contacting the continuous surface do not fall into the opening. Are arranged.

  Thereby, the game ball released from the discharge port in the storage tray rolls along the outer wall while being in contact with the outer wall, and is further guided to the rectifying unit along the continuous curved peripheral wall part. The plurality of game balls are guided in a line in the alignment portion. At that time, even if the lid provided at the opening is in an open state, the game balls released from the discharge port roll from the outer wall along the peripheral wall without falling into the opening, and are aligned from the rectifying unit. Led to the department. Therefore, by forming the flow straightening portion along the curved peripheral wall portion, the passage length from the discharge port to the alignment portion through the flow straightening portion is ensured to be relatively long, but the storage is performed so as not to fall from the opening portion. Since the outer wall and the peripheral wall portion of the portion are formed at a predetermined interval from the opening portion, the game ball can be guided without being smoothly dropped and discharged from the rectifying portion to the alignment portion.

1A Pachinko machine 2 Main body 2b Main body frame hinge 12A Game board 12a Game area 53b First big prize opening solenoid 55 Out port 55
70A Main control board 70Aa Main control board connector connection part 80A Sub control board 80Aa Sub control board connector connection part 100 Relay board 100a Relay board connector connection part 101 Game board relay board 101a Connector connection part 101b Wiring slot 400 Main body frame 405 Space 410 Mounting frame 411a Fixed portion 413 Game board movable stopper 415 Storage tank 416 First guide rod 416a Engaging portion 417 Discharge outlet 418 Third guide rod 418a Receiving portion 420 Mounting base 430 Cover member 431 Back surface portion 431a Recessed portion 432 Side surface portion 432a Side first concave portion 432c Side second concave portion 432e Opening portion 433 Mounting portion 434 Second guide rod 434a Receiving portion 434b Rib 700 Dispensing device 730C First guide passage 730D Second guide passage 700 Dispensing device 710 Ball supply passage 72 Ball delivery mechanism 730 Ball passage unit 730A Inlet port 730B Discharge port 730C First guide passage 730D Second guide passage 731 Passage partition member 732 Fill detection lever 733 Fill detection sensor 734 First cover member 735 Second cover member 736 Ball removal Member 736A Ball outlet 800 Ball detection unit 810 Right side configuration member 820 Left side configuration member 830 Projection piece member 840 First detection sensor 850 Second detection sensor 900 Dish unit 901 Discharge outlet 910 Decoration cover 920 Main body portion 920A Alignment portion 920Aa Guide piece 920Ab Inlet 920B Open / close lid 930 Saucepan cover member 930A Cover part 930Aa Outer wall 930Ab Open 930B Outer part 930C Rectifying part 930D Slope part 930E Storage part 930Ea Outer wall part 930F Opening part 9 0 ball vent passage member VC virtual circle b projector unit b1 projector cover b2 projector body b3 mirror member b4 screen unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising: a mounting base; a gaming machine component including an electrical component; and a cover member that covers the mounting base from the back side;
The cover member can accommodate at least a part of the gaming machine components in a space formed by a back surface portion and at least two side surface portions,
The width of the back portion is formed narrower than the width of the mounting base,
The side surface portion includes an attachment portion that can be attached to the attachment base on an end portion side not adjacent to the back surface portion, and at least one of the side surface portions extends from the end portion on which the attachment portion is provided to the back surface portion. Formed so as to incline to the adjacent end,
The cover member is
An opening provided to connect a wiring from a gaming machine component housed in the space to a gaming machine component provided outside the cover member;
A specific accommodating portion that is provided on an outer surface of the side surface portion and is capable of accommodating a specific gaming machine component connected to the wiring via the opening;
A general accommodating portion provided on the outer surface of the cover member, and configured by at least two accommodating portions each capable of accommodating a plurality of other types of gaming machine components.
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein at least two of the storage units are adjacent to the specific storage unit.

Images